AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY

SCHEME OF STUDIES

Ist Year
T P C Page
Gen-111 Islamiat and Pakistan Studies 1 0 1 1
Eng-112 English 2 0 2 11
Math-113 Applied Mathematics 3 0 3 13
Phy-122 Applied Physics 1 3 2 18
Ch-152 Applied Chemistry 1 3 2 23
MT-113A Workshop Practice-I 1 6 3 27
A) Metal Work 0 3
B) Wood Work 0 2
C) Welding 0 1
D) Theory 1 0
MT-143 Basic Engineering Drawing and CAD-I 1 6 3 33
EL.T-114 Electrical Essentials and Networks 3 3 4 41
AT-113 Introduction to Computing 2 3 3 52
AT-121 Occupational Health, Safety and Environment 1 0 1 63
AT-131 Automation Fundamentals-I 1 0 1 67
Total: 17 24 25

2nd Year
T P C Page
Gen-211 Islamiat and Pakistan Studies 1 0 1 71
Phy-212 Applied Mechanics 1 3 2 78
Math-212 Applied Mathematics-II 2 0 2 83
Mgm-211 Business Communication 1 0 1 87
Mgm-221 Business Management and Industrial Economics 1 0 1 91
El.T-222 Motors and Generators 1 3 2 95
AT-215 Digital Electronics 3 6 5 100
AT-225 Microprocessor 3 6 5 115
AT-233 Automation Fundamentals-II 2 3 3 122
AT-241 Industrial Materials 1 0 1 129
AT-253 Electronic Devices and Circuits 2 3 3 132
Total: 19 24 26

3rd Year
T P C Page
Gen-311 Islamiat and Pakistan Studies 1 0 1 140
Mgm-311 Industrial Management & Human Relations 1 0 1 147
MT-332 Industrial Engineering 1 3 2 151
AT-312 Actuators, Drives and Linkages 1 3 2 156
AT-322 Fundamentals of Fluidics 1 3 2 163
AT-332 Computer Applications 1 3 2 170
AT-344 PLC 2 6 4 184
AT-352 CNC Theory and Applications 1 3 2 191
AT-363 Process Control 2 3 3 200
AT-372 Final Project 0 6 2 209
Total: 11 30 21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Eng-112: ENGLISH

Total Contact Hours:

Theory: 64
Practical: 0 T P C
2 0 2

AIMS: At the end of the course, the students will be equipped with cognitive skill have the capability of presenting
facts in a systematic and logical manner to meet the demands of English language in the dynamic fields
commerce and industry. The course is designed to inculcate skills of reading, writing and comprehending
the facts from the written material. This will also help the students in developing speaking skill.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. PROSE/TEXT 13 Hours
1.1 First eight essays of Intermediate English Book-II for the province of the Punjab and first eight
essays of Intermediate English Book-I for other provinces.

2. GROUP DISCUSSION/SPEAKING (Sessional Evaluation) 13 Hours

3. GRAMMAR 19 Hours
3.1 Sentence structure
3.2 Tenses (correct use of verb/tense)
3.3 Parts of speech
3.4 Change of direct speech into indirect form
3.5 Words often confused.

4. COMPOSITION 13 Hours
4.1 Business letters
4.2 Applications for job, character certificate and grant of scholarship
4.3 Essay writing (topics specified in Instructional objectives).

5. TRANSLATION 6 Hours
5.1 Translation from Urdu into English (for Foreign Students: A paragraph or a dialogue).

RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Intermediate English Text Book-I & II.
2. An English Grammar and Composition of Intermediate Level.
3. A Hand Book of English Students By Gatherer.

11
Eng-112: ENGLISH

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES:

1. Demonstrate Better Reading, Comprehension and Vocabulary.

1.1 Describe and narrate in simple English.
1.2 Identify the author and the essay.
1.3 Write summaries of the textual essays.
1.4 Identify facts and ideas.

2. Listen and Speak English Clearly (Sessional Evaluation).

2.1 Converse fluently.
2.2 Express ideas clearly.

3. Apply the Grammatical Rules to Writing a Speaking.

3.1 Describe sentence structure.
3.1.1 Identify kinds of sentences.
3.2 Use correct verb/tense in sentences.
3.2.1 Identify the tense of a sentence.
3.3 Narrate the direct speech in indirect form.
3.4 Distinguish between confusing words.

4. Apply the Concepts of Composition Writing to Practical Situations.

4.1 Write letters to communicate messages in the business world (inquiry, placing orders, complaints
etc.).
4.1.1 Identify parts of a business letter.
4.1.2 Describe the qualities of a good business letter.
4.2 Write applications for job opportunities, grant of character certificate and grant of scholarship.
4.2.1 Describe the structure of application.
4.2.2 Design and compose Curriculum Vitae (C.V.), Bio-data or Resume separately.
4.3 Write essays pertaining to Technical Education, Science and our life, Computer, Environmental
Pollution, Duties of a student and Life of a Technician or develop an essay from the given outline
of some scientific topics.
4.3.1 Identify major kinds of essay.

5. Apply Rules of Translation.

5.1 Convert sentences from Urdu to English.
5.2 Translate a passage of Urdu into English making appropriate substitution of words.

12
Math-113 APPLIED MATHEMATICS-I
T P C
3 0 3
Total Contact Hours
Theory 96 Hours.

Pre-requisite: Must have completed a course of Elective Mathematics at Matric level.

AIMS: After completing the course the students will be able to

1. Solve problems of Algebra, Trigonometry, vectors, Mensuration, Matrices and Determinants.
2. Develop skill, mathematical attitudes and logical perception in the use of mathematical
instruments as required in the technological fields.
3. Acquire mathematical clarity and insight in the solution of technical problems.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 6 Hours

1.1 Standard Form
1.2 Solution
1.3 Nature of roots
1.4 Sum & Product of roots
1.5 Formation
1.6 Problems

2. ARITHMETIC PROGRESSION AND SERIES. 3 Hours

2.1 Sequence
2.2 Series
2.3 nth term
2.4 Sum of the first n terms
2.5 Means
2.6 Problems

3. GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION AND SERIES. 3 Hours

3.1 nth term
3.2 Sum of the first n terms
3.3 Means
3.4 Infinite Geometric progression
3.5 Problems

4. BINOMIAL THEOREM 6 Hours

4.1 Factorials
4.2 Binomial Expression
4.3 Binomial Co-efficient
4.4 Statement
4.5 The General Term
4.6 The Binomial Series

5. PARTIAL FRACTIONS 6 Hours

5.1 Introduction
5.2 Linear Distinct Factors Case I
5.3 Linear Repeated Factors Case II
5.4 Quadratic Distinct Factors Case III
5.5 Quadratic Repeated Factors Case IV
5.6 Problems

13
6. FUNDAMENTALS OF TRIGONOMETRY 6 Hours
6.1 Angles
6.2 Quadrants
6.3 Measurements of Angles
6.4 Relation between Sexagesimal & circular system
6.5 Relation between Length of a Circular Arc & the Radian Measure of its central Angle
6.6 Problems

7. TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS AND RATIOS 6 Hours

7.1 Trigonometric functions of any angle
7.2 Signs of trigonometric Functions
7.3 Trigonometric Ratios of particular Angles
7.4 Fundamental Identities
7.5 Problems

8. GENERAL IDENTITIES 6 Hours

8.1 The Fundamental Law
8.2 Deductions
8.3 Sum & Difference Formulae
8.4 Double Angle Identities
8.5 Half Angle Identities
8.6 Conversion of sum or difference to products
8.7 Problems

9. SOLUTION OF TRIANGLES 6 Hours

9.1 The law of Sines
9.2 The law of Cosines
9.3 Measurement of Heights & Distances
9.4 Problems

10. MENSURATION OF SOLIDS 30 Hours

10.1 Review of regular plane figures and Simpson's Rule
10.2 Prisms
10.3 Cylinders
10.4 Pyramids
10.5 Cones
10.6 Frusta
10.7 Spheres

11. VECTORS 9 Hours

11.1 Scalers & Vectors
11.2 Addition & Subtraction
11.3 The unit Vectors i, j, k
11.4 Direction Cosines
11.5 Scaler or Dot Product
11.6 Deductions
11.7 Dot product in terms of orthogonal components
11.8 Vector or cross Product
11.9 Deductions
11.10 Analytic Expression for a x b.
11.11 Problems

14
12. MATRICES AND DETERMINANTS 9 Hours
12.1 Definition of Matrix
12.2 Rows & Columns
12.3 Order of a Matrix
12.4 Algebra of Matrices
12.5 Determinants
12.6 Properties of Determinants
12.7 Solution of Linear Equations
12.8 Problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Ghulam Yasin Minhas - Technical Mathematics Vol-I, Ilmi Kitab Khana, Lahore.

2. Prof. Riaz Ali Khan - Polytechnic Mathematic Series Vol I & II, Majeed Sons, Faisalabad

3. Prof. Sana Ullah Bhatti - A Text Book of Algebra and Trigonometry, Punjab Text Book Board,
Lahore.

15
Math-113 APPLIED MATHEMATICS-I

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. USE DIFFERENT METHODS FOR THE SOLUTION OF QUADRATIC EQUATIONS.

1.1 Define a standard quadratic equation.
1.2 Use methods of factorization and method of completing the square for solving the equations.
1.3 Derive quadratic formula.
1.4 Write expression for the discriminant.
1.5 Explain nature of the roots of a quadratic equation.
1.6 Calculate sum and product of the roots.
1.7 Form a quadratic equation from the given roots.
1.8 Solve problems involving quadratic equations.

2. UNDERSTAND APPLY CONCEPT OF ARITHMETIC PROGRESSION AND SERIES.

2.1 Define an Arithmetic sequence and a series.
2.2 Derive formula for the nth term of an A.P.
2.3 Explain Arithmetic Mean between two given numbers.
2.4 Insert n Arithmetic means between two numbers.
2.5 Derive formulas for summation of an Arithmetic series.
2.6 Solve problems on Arithmetic Progression and Series..

3. UNDERSTAND GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION AND SERIES.

3.1 Define a geometric sequence and a series.
3.2 Derive formula for nth term of a G.P.
3.3 Explain geometric mean between two numbers.
3.4 Insert n geometric means between two numbers.
3.5 Derive a formula for the summation of geometric Series.
3.6 Deduce a formula for the summation of an infinite G.P.
3.7 Solve problems using these formulas.

4. EXPAND AND EXTRACT ROOTS OF A BINOMIAL.

4.1 State binomial theorem for positive integral index.
4.2 Explain binomial coefficients: (n,0), (n,1).....,(n,r)......, (n,n)
4.3 Derive expression for the general term.
4.4 Calculate the specified terms.
4.5 Expand a binomial of a given index.
4.6 Extract the specified roots.
4.7 Compute the approximate value to a given decimal place.
4.8 Solve problems involving binomials.

5. RESOLVE A SINGLE FRACTION INTO PARTIAL FRACTIONS USING DIFFERENT METHODS.

5.1 Define a partial fraction, a proper and an improper fraction.
5.2 Explain all the four types of partial fractions.
5.3 Set up equivalent partial fractions for each type.
5.4 Explain the methods for finding constants involved.
5.5 Resolve a single fraction into partial fractions.
5.6 Solve problems involving all the four types.
6. UNDERSTAND SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT OF ANGLES.
6.1 Define angles and the related terms.
6.2 Illustrate the generation of an angle.
6.3 Explain sexagesimal and circular systems for the measurement of angles.
6.4 Derive the relationship between radian and degree.
6.5 Convert radians to degrees and vice versa.
6.6 Derive a formula for the circular measure of a central angle.
6.7 Use this formula for solving problems.

16
7. APPLY BASIC CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES OF TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS.
7.1 Define the basic trigonometric functions/ratios of an angle as ratios of the sides of a right
triangle.
7.2 Derive fundamental identities.
7.3 Find trigonometric ratios of particular angles.
7.4 Draw the graph of trigonometric functions.
7.5 Solve problems involving trigonometric functions.

8. USE TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES IN SOLVING TECHNOLOGICAL PROBLEMS.

8.1 List fundamental identities.
8.2 Prove the fundamental law.
8.3 Deduce important results.
8.4 Derive sum and difference formulas.
8.5 Establish half angle,double angle & triple angle formulas.
8.6 Convert sum or difference into product & vice versa.
8.7 Solve problems.

9. USE CONCEPTS, PROPERTIES AND LAWS OF TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS FOR SOLVING

TRIANGLES.
9.1 Define angle of elevation and angle of depression.
9.2 Prove the law of sines and the law of cosines.
9.3 Explain elements of a triangle.
9.4 Solve triangles and the problems involving heights and distances.

10. USE PRINCIPLES OF MENSURATION IN FINDING SURFACES, VOLUMES AND WEIGHTS OF

SOLIDS.
10.1 Define mensuration of plane and solid figures.
10.2 List formulas for perimeters & areas of plane figure.
10.3 Define pyramid and cone.
10.4 Define frusta of pyramid and cone.
10.5 Define a sphere and a shell.
10.6 Calculate the total surface and volume of each type of solid.
10.7 Compute weight of solids.
10.8 Solve problems of these solids.
11. USE THE CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLES OF VECTORS IN SOLVING TECHNOLOGICAL
PROBLEMS.
11.1 Define vector quantity.
11.2 Explain addition and subtraction of vector.
11.3 Illustrate unit vectors i, j, k.
11.4 Express a vector in the component form.
11.5 Explain magnitude, unit vector, direction cosines of a vector.
11.6 Derive analytic expression for dot product and cross product of two vector.
11.7 Deduce conditions of perpendicularity and parallelism of two vectors.
11.8 Solve problems
12. USE THE CONCEPT OF MATRICES & DETERMINANTS IN SOLVING TECHNOLOGICAL
PROBLEMS.
12.1 Define a matrix and a determinant.
12.2 List types of matrices.
12.3 Define transpose, adjoint and inverse of a matrix.
12.4 State properties of determinants.
12.5 Explain basic concepts.
12.6 Explain algebra of matrices.
12.7 Solve linear equation by matrices.
12.8 Explain the solution of a determinant.
12.9 Use Crammers Rule for solving linear equations.

17
Phy-122 APPLIED PHYSICS

Total Contact Hours

Theory 32 T P C
Practical 96 1 3 2

AIMS: The students will be able to understand the fundamental principles and concept of physics,
use these to solve problems in practical situations/technological courses and understand
concepts to learn advance physics/technical courses.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. MEASUREMENTS. 2 Hours.
1.1 Fundamental units and derived units
1.2 Systems of measurement and S.I. units
1.3 Concept of dimensions, dimensional formula
1.4 Conversion from one system to another
1.5 Significant figures

2. SCALARS AND VECTORS. 4 Hours.

2.1 Revision of head to tail rule
2.2 Laws of parallelogram, triangle and polygon of forces
2.3 Resolution of a vector
2.4 Addition of vectors by rectangular components
2.5 Multiplication of two vectors, dot product and cross product

3. MOTION 4 Hours.
3.1 Review of laws and equations of motion
3.2 Law of conservation of momentum
3.3 Angular motion
3.4 Relation between linear and angular motion
3.5 Centripetal acceleration and force
3.6 Equations of angular motion

4. TORQUE, EQUILIBRIUM AND ROTATIONAL INERTIA. 4 Hours.

4.1 Torque
4.2 Centre of gravity and centre of mass
4.3 Equilibrium and its conditions
4.4 Torque and angular acceleration
4.5 Rotational inertia

5. WAVE MOTION. 5 Hours

5.1 Review Hooke's law of elasticity
5.2 Motion under an elastic restoring force
5.3 Characteristics of simple harmonic motion
5.4 S.H.M. and circular motion
5.5 Simple pendulum
5.6 Wave form of S.H.M.
5.7 Resonance
5.8 Transverse vibration of a stretched string

18
6. SOUND. 5 Hrs
6.1 Longitudinal waves
6.2 Intensity, loudness, pitch and quality of sound
6.3 Units of Intensity of level and frequency response of ear
6.4 Interference of sound waves silence zones, beats
6.5 Acoustics
6.6 Doppler effect.

7. LIGHT. 5 Hours
7.1 Review laws of reflection and refraction
7.2 Image formation by mirrors and lenses
7.3 Optical instruments
7.4 Wave theory of light
7.5 Interference, diffraction, polarization of light waves
7.6 Applications of polarization in sunglasses, optical activity and stress analysis

8. OPTICAL FIBER. 2 Hours

8.1 Optical communication and problems
8.2 Review total internal reflection and critical angle
8.3 Structure of optical fiber
8.4 Fiber material and manufacture
8.5 Optical fiber - uses.

9. LASERS. 3 Hours
9.1 Corpuscular theory of light
9.2 Emission and absorption of light
9.3 Stimulated absorption and emission of light
9.4 Laser principle
9.5 Structure and working of lasers
9.6 Types of lasers with brief description.
9.7 Applications (basic concepts)
9.8 Material processing
9.9 Laser welding
9.10 Laser assisted machining
9.11 Micro machining
9.12 Drilling, scribing and marking
9.13 Printing
9.14 Lasers in medicine
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1 Tahir Hussain, Fundamentals of Physics Vol-I and II
2 Farid Khawaja, Fundamentals of Physics Vol-I and II
3 Wells and Slusher, Schaum's Series Physics .
4 Nelkon and Oyborn, Advanced Level Practical Physics
5 Mehboob Ilahi Malik and Inam-ul-Haq, Practical Physics
6 Wilson, Lasers - Principles and Applications
7 M. Aslam Khan and M. Akram Sandhu, Experimental Physics Note Book

19
Phy-122 APPLIED PHYSICS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. USE CONCEPTS OF MEASUREMENT TO PRACTICAL SITUATIONS AND TECHNOLOGICAL

PROBLEMS.
1.1 Write dimensional formulae for physical quantities
1.2 Derive units using dimensional equations
1.3 Convert a measurement from one system to another
1.4 Use concepts of measurement and Significant figures in problem solving.

2. USE CONCEPTS OF SCALARS AND VECTORS IN SOLVING PROBLEMS INVOLVING THESE

CONCEPTS.
2.1 Explain laws of parallelogram, triangle and polygon of forces
2.2 Describe method of resolution of a vector into components
2.3 Describe method of addition of vectors by rectangular components
2.4 Differentiate between dot product and cross product of vectors
2.5 Use the concepts in solving problems involving addition resolution and multiplication of
vectors.

3. USE THE LAW OF CONSERVATION OF MOMENTUM AND CONCEPTS OF ANGULAR

MOTION TO PRACTICAL SITUATIONS.
3.1 Use law of conservation of momentum to practical/technological problems.
3.2 Explain relation between linear and angular motion
3.3 Use concepts and equations of angular motion to solve relevant technological problems.

4. USE CONCEPTS OF TORQUE, EQUILIBRIUM AND ROTATIONAL INERTIA TO PRACTICAL

SITUATION/PROBLEMS.
4.1 Explain Torque
4.2 Distinguish between Centre of gravity and centre of mass
4.3 Explain rotational Equilibrium and its conditions
4.4 Explain Rotational Inertia giving examples
4.5 Use the above concepts in solving technological problems.

5. USE CONCEPTS OF WAVE MOTION IN SOLVING RELEVANT PROBLEMS.

5.1 Explain Hooke's Law of Elasticity
5.2 Derive formula for Motion under an elastic restoring force
5.3 Derive formulae for simple harmonic motion and simple pendulum
5.4 Explain wave form with reference to S.H.M. and circular motion
5.5 Explain Resonance
5.6 Explain Transverse vibration of a stretched string
5.7 Use the above concepts and formulae of S.H.M. to solve relevant problems.

6. UNDERSTAND CONCEPTS OF SOUND.

6.1 Describe longitudinal wave and its propagation
6.2 Explain the concepts: Intensity, loudness, pitch and quality of sound
6.3 Explain units of Intensity of level and frequency response of ear
6.4 Explain phenomena of silence zones, beats
6.5 Explain Acoustics of buildings
6.6 Explain Doppler effect giving mathematical expressions.

7. USE THE CONCEPTS OF GEOMETRICAL OPTICS TO MIRRORS and LENSES.

7.1 Explain laws of reflection and refraction
7.2 Use mirror formula to solve problems
7.3 Use the concepts of image formation by mirrors and lenses to describe working of optical
instruments, e.g. microscopes, telescopes, camera and sextant.

20
8. UNDERSTAND WAVE THEORY OF LIGHT
8.1 Explain wave theory of light
8.2 Explain phenomena of interference, diffraction, polarization of light waves
8.3 Describe uses of polarization given in the course contents.

9. UNDERSTAND THE STRUCTURE, WORKING AND USES OF OPTICAL FIBER.

9.1 Explain the structure of the Optical Fiber
9.2 Explain its principle of working
9.3 Describe use of optical fiber in industry and medicine.

21
Phy-122 APPLIED PHYSICS

LIST OF PRACTICALS.

1 Draw graphs representing the functions:

a) y =mx for m=0, 0.5, 1, 2
b) y =x2
c) y =1/x
2 Find the volume of a given solid cylinder using vernier callipers.
3 Find the area of cross-section of the given wire using micrometer screw gauge.
4 Prove that force is directly proportional to (a) mass, (b) acceleration, using fletchers' trolley.
5 Verify law of parallelogram of forces using Grave-sands apparatus.
6 Verify law of triangle of forces and Lami's theorem
7 Determine the weight of a given body using
a) Law of parallelogram of forces
b) Law of triangle of forces
c) Lami's theorem
8 Verify law of polygon of forces using Grave-sands apparatus.
9 Locate the position and magnitude of resultant of like parallel forces.
10 Determine the resultant of two unlike parallel forces.
11 Find the weight of a given body using principle of moments.
12 Locate the centre of gravity of regular and irregular shaped bodies.
13 Find Young's Modules of Elasticity of a metallic wire.
14 Verify Hooke's Law using helical spring.
15 Study of frequency of stretched string with length.
16 Study of variation of frequency of stretched string with tension.
17 Study resonance of air column in resonance tube and find velocity of sound.
18 Find the frequency of the given tuning fork using resonance tube.
19 Find velocity of sound in rod by Kundt's tube.
20 Verify rectilinear propagation of light and study shadow formation.
21 Study effect of rotation of plane mirror on reflection.
22 Compare the refractive indices of given glass slabs.
23 Find focal length of concave mirror by locating centre of curvature.
24 Find focal length of concave mirror by object and image method
25 Find focal length of concave mirror with converging lens.
26 Find refractive index of glass by apparent depth.
27 Find refractive index of glass by spectrometer.
28 Find focal length of converging lens by plane mirror.
29 Find focal length of converging lens by displacement method.
30 Find focal length of diverging lense using converging lens.
31 Find focal length of diverging lens using concave mirror.
32 Find angular magnification of an astronomical telescope.
33 Find angular magnification of a simple microscope (magnifying glass)
34 Find angular magnification of a compound microscope.
35 Study working and structure of camera.
36 Study working and structure of sextant.
37 Compare the different scales of temperature and verify the conversion formula.
38 Determine the specific heat of lead shots.
39 Find the coefficient of linear expansion of a metallic rod.
40 Find the heat of fusion of ice.
41 Find the heat of vaporization.
42 Determine relative humidity using hygrometer.

22
Ch-152 APPLIED CHEMISTRY
T P C
1 3 2
Total Contact Hours
Theory 32
Practical 96

Pre-requisite: The student must have studied the subject of elective chemistry at Secondary school level.

AIMS After studying this course a student will be able to:

1. Understand the significance and role of chemistry in the development of modern technology.
2. Become acquainted with the basic principles of chemistry as applied in the study of relevant
Technology.
3. Know the scientific methods for production, properties and use of materials of industrial &
technological significance.
4. Gains skill for the efficient conduct of practicals in a Chemistry lab.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION AND FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS. 2 Hours

1.1 Orientation with reference to this technology.
1.2 Terms used & units of measurements in the study of chemistry.
1.3 Chemical Reactions & their types.

2. ATOMIC STRUCTURE. 2 Hours

2.1 Sub-atomic particles.
2.2 Architecture of atoms of elements, Atomic No. & Atomic Weight.
2.3 The periodic classification of elements periodic law
2.4 General characteristics of a period and group.

3. CHEMICAL BOND. 2 Hours

3.1 Nature of chemical Bond.
3.2 Electrovalent bond with examples.
3.3 Covalent Bond(Polar and Non-polar, sigma & Pi Bonds with examples.
3.4 Co-ordinate Bond with examples.

4. WATER. 2 Hours
4.1 Chemical nature and properties.
4.2 Impurities.
4.3 Hardness of water (types, causes & removal)
4.4 Scales of measuring hardness (Degrees Clark French, PPM, Mg- per liter).
4.5 Boiler feed water, scales and treatment.
4.6 Sea-water desalination, sewage treatment.

5. ACIDS, BASES AND SALTS. 2 Hours

5.1 Definitions with examples.
5.2 Properties, their strength, basicity & Acidity.
5.3 Salts and their classification with examples.
5.4 pH-value and scale.

6. OXIDATION & REDUCTION. 2 Hours

6.1 The process, definition & examples.
6.2 Oxidizing and Reducing agents.
6.3 Oxides and their classifications.

23
7. NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY. 2 Hours
7.1 Introduction.
7.2 Radioactivity (alpha, beta and gamma rays).
7.3 Half life process.
7.4 Nuclear reaction & transformation of elements.

8. CORROSION. 2 Hours
8.1 Introduction with causes.
8.2 Types of corrosion.
8.3 Rusting of iron.
8.4 Protective measures against-corrosion.

9. LUBRICANTS. 1 Hour
9.1 Introduction.
9.2 Classification.
9.3 Properties of lubricants.
9.4 Selection of lubricants.

10. POLLUTION. 1 Hour

10.1 The problem and its dangers.
10.2 Causes of pollution.
10.3 Remedies to combat the hazards of pollution.

11. POLYMERS AND RUBBER

11.1 Introduction with need.
11.2 Natural and Synthetic rubber.
11.3 Properties of unvulcanized and vulcanized rubber.
11.4 Processing of rubber.
11.5 Introduction and Types of Polymers.
11.6 Manufacturing Processes of Polymers.
11.7 Importance of Polymers.

12. SEMI-CONDUCTORS
12.1 Introduction
12.2 Atomic Structure of Silicon and Germanium.
12.3 Bonding and Conductivity.
12.4 Energy Bonds in a Semi-Conductor.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Text Book of Intermediate Chemistry (I & II)
2. Ilmi Applied Science by Sh. Atta Muhammad.

24
Ch-152 APPLIED CHEMISTRY

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. UNDERSTAND THE SCOPE, SIGNIFICANCE AND FUNDAMENTAL ROLE OF THE SUBJECT.

1.1 Explain the benefits of Chemistry with respect to Automation technology.
1.2 State the units of measurements in the study of chemistry and define the terms; Mote,
Symbol, Equation, Density, Molecular Weight, Valency, Radical, Ion, Matter, Mixture,
Compound, Solution, Energy, Physical Change and Chemical Change.
1.3 Write chemical formula of common compounds and describe types of chemical reactions
with examples.

2. UNDERSTAND THE STRUCTURE OF ATOMS AND ARRANGEMENT OF SUB ATOMIC

PARTICLES IN THE ARCHITECTURE OF ATOMS.
2.1 Define atom.
2.2 State the periodic law of elements.
2.3 Describe the fundamental sub atomic particles.
2.4 Distinguish between atomic no. and mass no.; isotopes and isobars.
2.5 Explain the arrangements of electrons in different shells and sub energy levels.
2.6 Explain the grouping and placing of elements in the periodic table.

3. UNDERSTAND THE NATURE OF CHEMICAL BOUND.

3.1 Define chemical bond.
3.2 Describe the nature of chemical bond.
3.3 Differentiate between electrovalent and covalent bonding.
3.4 Explain the formation of polar and non polar, sigma and pi-bond with examples.
3.5 Describe the nature of coordinate bond with examples.

4. UNDERSTAND THE CHEMICAL NATURE OF WATER.

4.1 Describe the chemical nature of water with its formula.
4.2 Describe the general impurities present in water.
4.3 Explain the causes and methods to removing hardness of water.
4.4 Express hardness in different units like mg/liter., p.p.m, degrees Clark and degrees French.
4.5 Describe the formation and nature of scales in boiler feed water.
4.6 Explain the method for the treatment of scales.
4.7 Explain the sewage treatment and desalination of sea water.

5. UNDERSTAND THE NATURE OF ACIDS, BASES AND SALTS.

5.1 Define acids, bases and salts with examples.
5.2 State general properties of acids and bases.
5.3 Differentiate between acidity and basicity and use the related terms.
5.4 Define salts, state their classification with examples.
5.5 Explain p-H value of solution and pH scale.

6. UNDERSTAND THE PROCESS OF OXIDATION AND REDUCTION.

6.1 Define oxidation.
6.2 Explain the oxidation process with examples.
6.3 Define reduction.
6.4 Explain reduction process with examples.
6.5 Define oxidizing and reducing agents and give at least six examples of each.
6.6 Define oxides.
6.7 Classify the oxides and give examples.

25
7. UNDERSTAND THE FUNDAMENTALS OF NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY.
7.1 Define nuclear chemistry and radio activity.
7.2 Differentiate between alpha , Beta and Gamma particles.
7.3 Explain half life process.
7.4 Explain at least six nuclear reactions resulting in the transformation of some elements.
7.5 State important uses of isotopes.

8. UNDERSTAND THE PROCESS OF CORROSION WITH ITS CAUSES AND TYPES.

8.1 Define corrosion.
8.2 Describe different types of corrosion.
8.3 State the causes of corrosion.
8.4 Explain the process of rusting of iron.
8.5 Describe methods to prevent/control corrosion.

9. UNDERSTAND THE NATURE OF LUBRICANTS.

9.1 Define a lubricant.
9.2 Explain the uses of lubricants.
9.3 Classify lubricants and cite examples.
9.4 State important properties of oils, greases and solid lubricants.
9.4 State the criteria for the selection of lubricant for particular purpose/job.

10. UNDERSTAND THE NATURE OF POLLUTION.

10.1 Define Pollution (air, water, food).
10.2 Describe the causes of environmental pollution.
10.3 Enlist some common pollutants.
10.4 Explain methods to prevent pollution.

11. UNDERSTAND THE NATURE AND IMPORTANCE OF POLYMERS AND RUBBER.

11.1 Define rubber as a material and describe its applications.
11.2 Explain the difference between Natural and Synthetic rubber.
11.3 Describe the properties of unvulcanized and vulcanized rubber.
11.4 Explain the processing i.e., compounding, mixing and shaping of rubbers.
11.5 Define polymers and explain the mechanism of polymerization.
11.6 Describe the preparation of PVC, Nylon, Polyethylene polymers.
11.7 Describe the importance of polymers.

12. UNDERSTAND THE NATURE AND IMPORTANCE OF SEMI-CONDUCTORS.

12.1 Define Semi-Conductors.
12.2 Draw the atomic structure of Silicon and Germanium.
12.3 Describe the process of bonding and conductivity in Conductors and Semi-Conductors.
12.4 Explain energy bands in Semi-Conductors.

26
MT-113A WORKSHOP PRACTICE-I (GENERAL METAL, WOOD WORK, AND WELDING)

Total contact hrs. T P C

Theory 32 1 6 3
Practical 192
Pre-requisites : None

AIMS The student will be familiarized with the Tools, Equipment, Machines used in the metal work,
Welding and wood work. The student will achieve the basic skills in the above fields by preparing
specific jobs in each part of the subject.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. GENERAL METAL SHOP ORIENTATION 1 Hour

1.1 Introduction to course
1.2 statement of shop policies
1.3 Introduction to shop work supporting machines
1.3.1 Operating procedure
1.3.2 Care and maintenance
1.3.3 Safety operation.
1.4 Shop Safety Procedure

2. METAL WORK TOOLS AND MACHINES 13 Hours

2.1 Kind of Tools and machines
2.1.1 Hand Tools
2.1.1.1 Measuring tools
2.1.1.2 Layout tools.
2.1.1.3 Cutting tools
2.1.1.4 Chisels
2.1.1.5 Files and filing
2.1.1.6 Hacksaw and hacksawing
2.1.1.7 Drill & drilling
2.1.1.8 Hand threading.
2.1.1.9 Miscellaneous tools and related information.
2.1.2 Machines.
2.1.2.1 Drilling Machine.
2.1.2.2 Power Hacksaw
2.1.2.3 Bending Machine
2.1.2.4 Rolling Machine
2.1.2.5 Shearing machine.

3. WOOD WORKING TOOLS. 4 Hours

3.1 Wood working shop orientation.
3.2 Impact Tools.
3.3 Measuring Tools.
3.4 Cutting Tools.
3.5 Marking Tools.
3.6 Holding Tools.

4. WOOD WORKING MACHINES. 4 Hours

4.1. Introduction
4.2 Radial saw
4.3 Circular Saw.
4.4 Band Saw.
4.5 Jointer
4.6 Wood turning lathe

27
5. WOOD CUTS AND WOOD JOINTS. 4 Hours
5.1 Types and uses of wood cuts.
5.2 Classification and uses of wood joints.
5.3 Making wood cuts and wood joints.
5.4 Wood glue and wood fastener.
5.5 Kind & seasoning of wood.

6. WELDING SHOP 2 Hours

6.1 Introduction to course.
6.2 Statement of shop policies
6.3 Introduction to shop work support machine.
6.3.1 Operating procedures
6.3.2 Care and maintenance.
6.3.3 Safety precautions.
6.4 Shop safety operations.

7. WELDING HAND TOOLS AND MACHINES. 4 Hours

7.1 Kind of welding shop Tools and machine.
7.1.1 Hand lay out Tools.
7.1.2 Gas welding Tools.
7.1.3 Welding processes.
7.2 Introduction to Oxygen-Acetylene Welding.
7.2.1 Welding principles.
7.2.2 Welding tests and equipment
7.2.3 Welding materials
7.2.4 Welding processes.

28
MT-113A WORKSHOP PRACTICE-I (GENERAL METAL, WOOD WORK, AND WELDING)

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

A) GENERAL METAL

1. FAMILIAR THE STUDENT WITH THE SHOP LAYOUT & RULES AND ITS ENVIRONMENTS.
1.1 Describe the shop working policies
1.2 Describe the basic concept of general metal shop
1.3 Identify shop tools
1.4 Explain power driven tools
1.5 Describe safety rules of the shop

2. METAL WORK TOOLS AND MACHINES

2.1 Understand metal working hand tools.
2.1.1 Classify metal working hand tools
2.1.2 Describe measuring tools
2.1.3 Describe Layout tools & Practice
2.1.4 Describe cutting tools & practice
2.1.5 Describe chisels & chiselling
2.1.6 Describe files and filling
2.1.7 Describe Hack saw and Hack sawing
2.1.8 Describe drills and drilling
2.1.9 Describe hand Threading
2.1.10 Describe miscellaneous tools and related practice
2.2 Understand the metal working machines.
2.2.1 Explain the drilling machine
2.2.2 Explain the power hacksaw
2.2.3 Explain bending machine
2.2.4 Explain rolling machine
2.2.5 Explain shearing machine
2.2.6 Observe safety precautions and proper care of metal working tools.

B) WOOD WORK

3. UNDERSTAND WOOD WORKING SHOP POLICIES, HAND TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

SUPPORTING WOOD WORKING SHOP
3.1 Describe the shop working policies
3.2 Describe the basic concept of wood work shop
3.3 classify wood working hand tools
3.4 Classify wood working hand tools according to functions
3.5 Describe the use of Impact tools
3.6 Describe the use of cutting tools.
3.7 Describe the use of measuring tools.
3.8 Describe the use of marking tools.
3.9 Describe the use of Holding tools.
3.10 Describe sharpening of wood cutting tools.
3.11 Observe safety precautions and proper care of wood working hand tools.

4. OPERATES EFFECTIVELY ALL WOOD WORKING MACHINES

4.1 Identify all wood working machines.
4.2 Classify wood working machine according to their uses.
4.3 Explain the radial saw.
4.4 Explain the circular saw.
4.5 Explain the Band saw.
4.6 Explain the jointer and planner.

29
 4.7 Explain the wood turning lathe.
4.8 Operate the radial saw.
4.9 Operate the circular saw.
4.10 Operate the Band saw.
4.11 Operate the jointer & Planner.
4.12 Operate the wood turning lathe.
4.13 Observe safety precaution & proper care of wood working machines

5. PREPARE THE WOOD CUTS AND WOOD JOINTS ACCORDING TO THE SPECIFICATION AND
SIZES.
5.1 Describe the wood cuts and types of joints.
5.2 Explain the use of wood joints
5.3 Select the appropriate joint for the given wood.
5.4 Prepare cross halving wood joint.
5.5 Prepare dove tail joint.
5.6 Prepare mortise and tenon joints.
5.7 Prepare Dado joint.
5.8 Prepare the open corner joint.
5.9 Prepare the hidden corner joint.
5.10 Prepare wood joint glue.
5.11 Manipulate wood fasteners.
5.12 Practice sharpening of hand tools.
5.13 Describe kind of wood.
5.14 Explain seasoning methods of wood.

C) WELDING

6. FAMILIARIZE WITH THE SHOP AREA POLICIES AND DIFFERENT TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
SUPPORTING WELDING.
6.1 Describe the shop working policies.
6.2 Describe the basic concept of welding.
6.3 Explain shop tools of welding.
6.4 Explain welding shop equipment.
6.5 Describe safety rules of welding.

7. WELDING HAND TOOLS AND MACHINES.

7.1 Understand the use of hand tools.
7.1.1 Identify gas welding tools.
7.1.2 Describe gas welding tools.
7.1.3 Identify gas welding tools.
7.1.4 Identify Electric Arc welding tools.
7.2 Understand the use of welding equipment.
7.2.1 Identify the gas welding equipment.
7.2.2 Identify the Arc welding equipment.
7.2.3 Describe the gas welding equipment.
7.2.4 Describe the arc welding processes.
7.3 Apply the welding methods safely.
7.3.1 Explain use of Oxy-acetylene welding
7.3.2 Practice gas welding flame
7.3.3 Practice gas welding.
7.3.4 Practice Arc welding.
7.3.5 Observe safety precautions

30
MT-113A WORKSHOP PRACTICE-I (GENERAL METAL, WOOD WORK, AND WELDING)

LIST OF PRACTICALS

A) Metal Shop 96 Hours

1. Preparation of name plate.
2. Sawing exercise
3. Preparation of inside calliper.
4. Preparation of Bottle opener.
5. Preparation of dove-tail joint.
6. Preparation of small size Try-square
7. Preparation of Coat hook
8. Preparation of funnel (sheet)
9. Preparation of Pin tray (sheet)
10. Preparation of Drawer handle
11. Preparation of bevel square
12. Preparation of Spanner (small size)

B) WOOD WORKING SHOP 64 Hours

1. Safety precautions in wood working shop.
2. Assembly and disassembly of jack-plane.
3. Using of various wood working planes. (Tool exercise.)
4. Planning and squaring to dimensions. (Job-1)
5. Sharpening plane-iron.
6. Introducing different wood working, layout and measuring tools.
7. Sawing exercise (job-2)
8. Identifying different types of 'handsaws' and making sketches of all saws.
9. Sharpening `bandsaws'.
10. Wood chiseling(Chipping).
11. Making mortise & tanon joint. (job-3)
12. Sharpening wood chisel.
13. Making dado-joint (job-4).
14. Making cross-lap joint. (job-5)
15. Observing wood structure.
16. Identifying and comparing soft and hard wood.
17. Spirit polishing (preparing wood surface for polishing, staining and lacquering)
18. Boring process, making holes of different diameters in wood. (job-6)
19. Nailing and wood screwing process. (job-7+8)
20. Making middle half cross-lap joint. (job-9)
21. Making dove-tail joint. (job-10)
22. Wood working projects etc.

C) Welding Shop 32 Hours

1. Flame making practice.
2. Pool making.
3. Bead making.
4. Butt joint.
5. Lap joint.
6. Corner joint without filler rod.
7. Corner joint with filler rod.
8. T. joint.
9. Edge joint.
10. Brazing practice.

31
 ARC WELDING
11. Arc making/current setting/polarity selection.
12. Bead making.
13. Butt joint.
14. Lap joint.
15. Corner joint.
16. T. joint.
17. V. Butt joint.
18. Square corner joint.
19. Bevel butt joint.
20. Spot Welding.

32
MT-143 BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING & CAD-I
T P C
1 6 3
Total contact hrs.

Theory 32
Practicals 192

Pre-requisite: None

AIMS At the end of this course the students will be able to understand the fundamentals of engineering
drawing used in the various fields of industry specially in the Mechanical Technology. The student
will be familiarized with the use of conventional drawing instruments as well as the modern
technology used for this subject. The CAD portion of the subject will provide the student the
knowledge & use of computer in the subject of Engineering Drawing.

COURSE CONTENTS

PART-A ENGINEERING DRAWING

1. USES AND APPLICATIONS OF TECHNICAL DRAWING 1 Hours

1.1 Technical drawing and the technician.
1.2 Use of technical drawing.
1.3 Common drawing forms.
1.4 Application of drawing forms.
1.5 Practices and conventions.

2. DRAWING TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES. 2 Hours

2.1 Drawing pencil
2.2 Drawing papers specifications
2.3 Drawing Instruments
2.4 Use and care of drawing instruments and material.

3. ALPHABET OF LINES USED IN DRAWING 2 Hours

3.1 Importance the alphabet of lines.
3.2 Common alphabet of lines
3.3 Uses and correct line weightage of the line.
3.4 Application of line

4. LETTERING. 2 Hours
4.1 Importance of good lettering.
4.2 Single stroke of gothic.
4.3 Letter strokes.
4.4 Letter guide lines.
4.5 Vertical single stroke gothic
4.6 Inclined single stroke gothic
4.7 Composition of lettering

5. DRAWING LINES TECHNOLOGY 2 Hours

5.1 Introduction to sketching techniques
5.2 Sketching lines
5.3 Sketching circles and arcs
5.4 Sketching ellipse.
5.5 Sketching views of objects

33
6. GEOMETRICAL CONSTRUCTIONS 2 Hours
6.1 Introduction to geometry
6.2 Definition of terms
6.3 Different conventional shapes, surfaces and objects
6.4 Basic geometrical construction
6.5 Construction, ellipse, parabola
6.6 Involute and cycloids

7. INTRODUCTION TO MULTI-VIEW PROJECTIONS 3 Hours

7.1 Definition and concept of multi-view drawings
7.2 Proceptual vies of plan of projections
7.3 Orthographic projections
7.4 1st angle and 3rd angle projections
7.5 Principal views
7.6 Arrangement of views
7.7 Multi-view drawings

8. INTRODUCTION TO PICTORIAL DRAWINGS. 2 Hours

8.1 Uses of pictorial
8.2 Three types of pictorial views
8.3 Isometric sketching of rectangular block
8.4 Isometric sketching of Arcs and circles
8.5 Oblique sketching of rectangular block
8.6 One point perspective sketching of a rectangular block.
8.7 Two point perspective sketching of a rectangular block.
8.8 Preparation of pictorial drawings of simple objects.

9. BASIC DIMENSIONING. 2 Hours

9.1 Definition of dimensioning.
9.2 Types of dimensioning.
9.3 Elements of dimensioning.
9.4 System of measurements.
9.5 Dimensioning multi-view drawings.
9.6 Dimensioning pictorial views.
9.7 Dimensioning rules and practices.
9.8 Notes and specification

10. SECTIONING AND SECTIONAL VIEWS. 2 Hours

10.1 Definition and purpose.
10.2 Cutting planes position and cutting plane lines
10.3 Types of sectional views.
10.4 Conventional section lines of different materials.
10.5 Practice sectioned views.

11. MULTI-VIEW DRAWING OF MACHINE ELEMENTS 2 Hours

11.1 Terminology and drawing of rivets and riveted joints
11.2 Terminology and drawing of screw threads
11.3 Terminology and drawing of keys and cotters
11.4 Description and drawing of simple bearings
11.5 Describe and drawing of simple coupling

34
PART-B: CAD-I

12. CAD FUNDAMENTALS 2 Hours

12.1 CAD & its importance
12.2 Purposes
12.3 Advantages

13. CAD SOFTWARE 2 Hours

13.1 CAD Abbreviations
13.2 CAD Help
13.3 Co-ordinate systems

14. BORDER TEMPLATE 2 Hours

14.1 Drawing area
14.2 SNAP & GRID
14.3 Pedit & Qsave

15. TITLE BLOCK 2 Hours

15.1 Change Command
15.2 Layer creation
15.3 Zooming
15.4 Typefaces of CAD
15.5 Plotting

16. LINES & CIRCLES 2 Hours

16.1 Dedit
16.2 Analyzed line drawing
16.3 U & Redo command
16.4 Drawing a circle

RECOMMENDED BOOKS:
1. Engineering drawing by French Wirk
2. ABC's of Auto CAD Release-12 by Alan R Miller

35
MT-143 BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING & CAD-I

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

SECTION-I ENGINERING DRAWING

1. USES AND APPLICATIONS OF TECHNICAL DRAWING

1.1 Know the uses of Technical Drawing
1.1.1 Describe the importance of Technical Drawing from the point of view of a
Technician
1.1.2 Explain the main uses of Technical Drawing from the point of view of a Technician
1.2 Recognizes the different application of Technical drawing
1.2.1 Identify commonly used drawing forms
1.2.2 Illustrate the different drawing forms
1.2.3 Differentiate different drawing forms
1.2.4 Develop Technical vocabulary

2. KNOW THE COMMON DRAWING TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

2.1 Identify the uses of different pencils for Technical Drawing.
2.2 Identify different paper sizes for drawing.
2.3 Identify different types of papers suitable for drawing.
2.4 Identify different types of erasers and their uses.
2.5 Maintain a will sharpened pencil for drawing.
2.6 Describe the drawing instruments.
2.7 State the use of drawing instruments.

3. UNDERSTAND THE IMPORTANCE OF ALPHABET, CORRECT WEIGHTAGE AND

APPLICATION OF LINES USES IN TECHNICAL DRAWING.
3.1 Knows the importance of lines.
3.2 Knows the Alphabet of lines.
3.3 Identify the lines characteristics of each alphabet of lines.
3.4 Draw horizontal, vertical and inclined lines
3.5 Draw alone line with correct weightages

4. APPLIES THE GOOD LETTERING AN A DRAWING

4.1 Know the importance of lettering in a Technical engineering drawing.
4.2 Identify the letter style used in Technical drawing.
4.3 State letter strokes and guide lines.
4.4 Perform better stroke in single stroke gothic.
4.5 Print vertical single stroke letters and numbers.
4.6 Print inclined single stroke letters and numbers.
4.7 Observe stability and pleasing appearance of letters in printing

5. UNDERSTAND SELECTING OF CIRCLES, ARCS, AND VIEWS OF OBJECTS.

5.1 Draw circular an arc using circular line method.
5.2 Draw a circular arc using square method.
5.3 Draw an ellipse using rectangular method.
5.4 Draw views of simple objects.

6. APPLY DRAWING SKILL WITH THE AID OF DRAWING INSTRUMENTS IN GEOMETRICAL

CONSTRUCTION
6.1 Define common terms used in geometrical construction.
6.2 Explain different geometrical shapes, surfaces of objects.
6.3 Draw basic geometrical construction.
6.4 Draw involute, cycloid, spiral, tangent to circle and are

36
7. UNDERSTAND THE MULTI VIEW OF PROJECTIONS SPECIFIC OBJECTIVE
7.1 Define the concept of multi-view drawings.
7.2 Knows principle planes of projections.
7.3 Knows the orthographic method of projection.
7.4 Explain the 1st and 3rd angle projections.
7.5 State six principle views.
7.6 Practice multi-view projections.

8. APPLY THE USE, TYPES AND METHODS OF PICTORIAL VIEWS

8.1 Knows the use of pictorial views.
8.2 Knows the pre-requisite of pictorial drawing.
8.3 State three types of pictorial drawings.
8.4 Draw isometric view of rectangular Blocks, Ares, circles.
8.5 Draw oblique sketching of rectangular blocks.
8.6 Draw one-point perspective view of a Rectangular block.
8.7 Draw Two point perspective view of a rectangular block.
8.8 Prepare/draw pictorial drawings of simple objects.

9. APPLY GOOD DIMENSIONING ON MULTIVIEWS AND PICTORIALS.

9.1 Define dimensioning.
9.2 Identify the types of dimensioning.
9.3 Enlist the elements of dimensioning.
9.4 Identify the system of measurements.
9.5 Indicate complete dimension on multi view drawings.
9.6 Indicate complete dimension or pictorial drawings.
9.7 Follow the general rules for dimensioning.
9.9 Indicate notes and specification or multiview drawings.

10. APPLY THE SECTIONING METHODS OF MATERIAL AND DRAW SECTIONAL VIEWS.
10.1 Define sectioning and its purpose.
10.2 Describe cutting planes and lines.
10.3 State types of sectional views.
10.4 Explain conventional section lines of different materials.
10.5 Practice sectioning.

11. APPLY DRAWING METHODS TO DRAW MULTIVIEWS OF MACHINE ELEMENTS.

11.1 Draw multiviews of vee-block.
11.2 Draw multiviews of Gland
11.3 Draw keys & cotters.
11.4 Draw Multi views of simple bearing.

37
SECTION-II COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN.

12. UNDERSTAND CAD FUNDAMENTALS.

12.1 Define CAD.
12.2 Describes importance of CAD.
12.3 States purpose of CAD.
12.4 Explain advantages of CAD.
12.5 Establish importance of CAD usage in industry.

13. UNDERSTAND CAD SOFTWARE.

13.1 Describe computer system requirements for CAD (e.g Auto CAD release 12 or latest).
13.2 State procedure of giving command to CAD.
13.3 State CAD (e.g autocad rel. 12 or latest) abbreviations.
13.4 State use of function keys.
13.5 Describe procedure of giving commands with a mouse.
13.6 Explain procedure of getting general help for a specific command.
13.7 Explain drawing cursor and coordinate read out.
13.8 Explain cartesian notion.
13.9 Explain polar notation.

14. UNDERSTAND BORDER TEMPLATE OF A DRAWING.

14.1 Describe setting up of drawing area.
14.2 Describe setting of displayed digits.
14.3 Explain changing the drawing limits.
14.4 Explain use of grid system (auto rel-12 or latest).
14.5 Explain adjustment of drawing scale.
14.6 Explain procedure of drawing line with line command.
14.7 Explain P-edit command for widening boarder.
14.8 Explain procedure of saving boarder template.

15. UNDERSTAND ADDING A TITLE BLOCK TO THE BORDER DRAWING.

15.1 Describe checking the drawing time.
15.2 Explain Change command.
15.3 Explain creation of layer for title block.
15.4 Explain procedure of creating a title block.
15.5 Explain Zoom command.
15.6 Explain importance of saving a drawing.
15.7 Explain use of CAD (Autocad R-12 or latest).
15.8 Explain filling in the title block by writing drawing title,name etc.
15.9 Explain procedure of plotting drawing on a plotter or printer.
15.10 Explain Qsave command.

16. UNDERSTAND DRAWING LINES AND CIRCLES.

16.1 State beginning of a new drawing.
16.2 Explain Dedit command (autocad R-12 or latest).
16.3 Describe viewing the entire drawing.
16.4 Explain drawing of angled line.
16.5 Explain U-command.
16.6 Explain Redo command.
16.7 Explain drawing a circle with circle command.
16.8 Explain automatic work saving procedures.

38
MT-143 BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING & CAD-I

LIST OF PRACTICALS 192 Hours

A. BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING:

1. Lettering 5mm height
2. Lettering 3mm height
3. Use of Tee Square and set squares for drawing horizontal, vertical and inclined lines.
4. use of Tee square and for drawing centres, crossing of lines
5. use of compass, circles, half circles, radius.
6. Draw round corners, figure inside and outside circle.
7. Plane geometry angles and triangles.
8. Plane Geometry quadrilateral square rhombus, rectangle and parallelogram
9. Plane geometry parallel-lines, perpendicular, bisect line and angle.
10. Plane geometry equal division of line and some radio with the help of compass and set square.
11. Plane geometry inscribe and circumscribe square, triangle and hexagon.
12. Plane geometry of construction of polygon, five, six, seven and eight sides.
13. Plane geometry of inscribe pentagon in a circle and pentagon by general and different methods.
14. Plane geometry of tangent of circle inside and outside
15. Plane geometry of construction of ellipse with two methods.
16. Plane geometry of construction of ellipse with next two methods.
17. Plane geometry of construction of parabola curve 4 methods
18. Plane geometry of construction of hyperbola curve
19. Plane geometry of Spiral curve
20. Plane geometry of helix curve.
21. Plane geometry of construction of involute curve of square rectangle hexagon and circle
22. Different types of drawing lines.
23. Orthographic projection 1 and 3rd angle L block
24. Orthographic projection 1 and 3rd angle Step Block
25. Orthographic projection 1 and 3rd angle Vee block
26. Orthographic projection 1 and 3rd angle Given Block
27. Orthographic projection 1 and 3rd angle Additional Block
28. Orthographic projection and Isometric Drawing Given Block
29. Orthographic projection and Isometric Drawing Given Block next
30. Orthographic projection and Isometric Drawing Given Block next
31. Different types of sectioning
32. different section lines for different material
33. Orthographic projection of Vee block sectional views.
34. Orthographic projection Gland sectional views
35. Orthographic projection Open bearing sectional views
36. Concept for different types of Drawings
37. Isometric and oblige drawings of cube with one hole.
38. Isometric and oblige drawings of another given block.
39. Missing lines and portions on given views
40. Missing lines and portions on given views next
41. Missing lines and portions on given views next
42. Missing lines and portions on given views next
43. Isometric scale and development of cube
44. Development of prism
45. Development of cylinder
46. Development of Cone
47. Development of Pyramid
48. Thread profile of square and vee threads.
49. Different types of threads
50. Sketch of hexagonal nut and bolt
51. Rivet heads
52. Single riveted lap joint
53. Single riveted but joint

39
B. COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN (Auto cad Rel-14 or latest).

1. Practice loading CAD software into computer memory.

2. Practice un loading CAD software safely and cone to Dos prompt.
3. Practice CAD abbreviations, auto CAD release 14 of latest (e.g A for Arc, C for circle, E for Erase
etc).
4. Practice function keys for short cuts.
5. Practice to draw two points using cartesian Notation on graph paper
6. Practice to draw straight line using polar coordinates on graph paper
7. Set-up drawing area using CAD software
8. Practice for Turning GRID ON and OFF and SNAP on and OFF
9. Draw a line with line command
10. Widen Border lines with pedit
11. Save Border Template (QSAVE)
12. Create layers and move border to it's own layer
13. Create a layer for Title Block
14. Create Title Block
15. Practice for Zoom command
16. Practice for CAD Type faces (Auto CAD Rel-14 or latest)
17. Practice for filling Title Block
18. Practice for plotting the drawing on plotter or printer
19. Begin a New drawing
20. Practice with Dedit command to make changes in the drawing
21. Draw an Angled line
22. Practice with U-Command and Redo command
23. Draw a circle with circle command

40
EI.T-114 ELECTRICAL ESSENTIALS AND NETWORKS

Total Contact Hours: T P C

Theory: 96 Hours 3 3 4
Practical: 96 Hours

Prerequisite: SSC Mathematics & Physic

AIMS This course is designed so that the student will be able to learn basic knowledge of electricity and
electronics.

Understand the operation and application of electrical and electronic principles, devices and
circuits.
1. Identify the different electrical/electronics component, devices and types of circuits.
2. Explain the principles of operations and applications of electrical and electronic
components, devices and circuits.
3. Use different electrical/electronic components and devices in different circuits
configuration.
4. Describe the ratings, tolerances, coding and troubles in different electrical and electronics
components and circuits.
5. Calculate current, voltage, power and power factor using circuit laws and network
theorems.
6. Use filters and coupling in electronics circuits.

COURSE CONTENTS.

1. BASIC PRINCIPLE OF ELECTRICITY 5 Hours

1.1 Electron Theory
1.1.1 Structure of atom, K, L and M shell, energy levels and valence electrons.
1.1.2 Energy bands with reference to conductors, insulators and semiconductor.
1.2 Electrical Ouantities
1.2.1 Potential, current and resistance.
1.2.2 Units of potential, current and resistance.
1.2.3 Conventional and electron current

2. DC FUNDAMENTALS. 12 Hours
2.1. Ohm'sLaw
2.1.1 Definition of Ohm's law.
2.1.2 Problems on Ohm's Law.
2.2. Laws of Resistance
2.2.1 Specific Resistance, conductance and conductivity.
2.2.2 Effect of temperature on resistance and temp. Coefficient of resistance.
2.2.3 Problems on R=Rho*LIA and Rt Ro (1 +xt)
2.2.4 Resistance in series, parallel and series-parallel
2.2.5 Calculations on combination of resistance and
cells in series, parallel and series-parallel combinations.
2.2.6 Power and Energy their units and calculations.
2.2.7 Power dissipation in resistors.
2.3 Kirchhoffs Laws
2.3.1 Introduction of Kirchhoff's Laws.
2.3.2 Calculation using KVL and KCL by loop and node methods.
2.4 Resistors
2.4.1 Resistor construction and types.
2.4.2 Application of resistors.
2.4.3 Resistors, colour coding

41
 2.4.4 Resistors, Power rating.
2.4.5 Resistor, troubles.
2.5 Batteries
2.5.1 Types of DC sources.
2.5.2 Types of cells , Primary and secondary cells(Mercury, silver oxide, Nickel-
cadmium, etc.)
2.5.3 Lead acid batteries.
2.5.4. Solar cell.
2.5.5 Internal resistance of a cell.
2.5.6 Application of cell as constant voltage and constant current source.

3. MAGNETISM AND ELECTROMAGNETISM. 12 Hours

3.1 Magnetism.
3.1.1 Introduction to magnetism, magnetic line of force, flux, flux~ensity, permeability,
Reluctance and their units.
3.1.2 Properties of magnetic lines of force.
3.1.3 TYpesofmagnets.
3.1.4 Magnetic properties of materials (ferro-,para- and dia-magnetic) magnetic
induction.
3.2 Electromagnetism.
3.2.1 Electromagnetism ,M.M.F. (AT) field intensity (H =ATIL)ampere-turnslmeter.
3.2.2. B-H curve and magnetic Hystersis.
3.2.3 Electromagnetic induction.
3.2.4 Magnetic field around a current carrying conductor and solenoids cork screw and
left hand rules.
3.2.5 Force between two magnetic fields and motor action.
3.2.6 Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic induction (R=Ndldt.)
3.2.7 Lanz's Law.

4. ELECTROSTATICS. 12 Hours
4.1 Principle of electrostatic, positive and negative charges.
4.2 Laws of electrostatic.
4.3 Electrostatic induction and field strength.
4.4 Properties of electric lines of force and comparison with magnetic lines.
4.5. Dielectric, dielectric strength and its importance permittivity and break down voltage.
4.6 Capacitance and capacitors. Capacitance of parallel plate capacitor.
4.7 Types and uses of capacitors.
4.8 Equivalent capacitance for series, parallel and series parallel combination of capacitors.
4.9 Energy stored in capacitors.
4.10 4.10 Colour code, tolerance and rating of capacitors.
4.11 Troubles in capacitors.

5. AC FUNDAMENTALS. 12 Hours
5.1 The simple AC £enerator.
5.1.1 Sine wave, cycle, wavelength, period, frequency and units.
5.1.2 AC sine wave form and its characteristics. (Instantaneous, peak, average, rms or
effective values and their inter relatio~).
5.1.3 Audio and Radio frequencies, wavelengths and periods frequency spectrum.
5.1.4 Types of alternating wave forms(sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal waves).
Fundamental wave and harmonics.
5.2 AC Circuits
5.2.1 AC through pure resistance, Phasor quantities.
5.2.2 Phse angle, in-phase, out of phase waves and phase lag & lead and power
factor.
5.2.3 Calculation of V11 and W for resistive circuits through inductance.
5.2.4 Self inductance, and self induced voltage.

42
 5.2.5 Inductive reactance (Xl -2ii~) Phase relation between V & I.
5.2.6 Phasor diagram and power for pure inductor.
5.2.7 AC through R-L series circuit.
5.2.8 Phasor diagram and power in a R-L series circuit.
5.2.9 Time constant ,t=LIR, and its effect.
5.2.10 Impedance, Impedance triangle.
5.2.11 AC through R-L parallel circuit.
5.2.12 Inductive reactance in series, parallel and series-parallel combination.
5.2.13 Q of coil and its effects on selectivity.
5.2.14 Skin effect, AF and RF chokes.
5.2.15 Troubles in chokes.
5.2.16 AC through pure capacitor. Phase relation between V&I and power.
5.2.17 Capacitive reactance
5.2.18 AC through R-C series circuit.
5.2.19 Time constant RC and its effect.
5.2.20 Impedance, IxI~nce triangle.
5.2.21 AC through R-C parallel circuit.
5.2.22 Capacitive reactance in series, parallel, and series parallel combination.
5.2.23 AC through RLC series circuit, phase relation and power calculation.
5.2.24 AC through RLC parallel circuit phase relation and power calculation.
5.2.25 Simple calculations for RLC circuits.
5.2.26 Concepts of real VI cos Q and apparent power (VA), power factor, simple
calculations

6. TRANSFORMER 6 Hours
6.1 Principle of transformer, mutual inductance, coefficient of mutual inductance.
6.2 Turn ratio and e.m.f. equation
6.3 Construction, types of transf~rmers, core materials.
6.4 Application of transformers in electrowcs.
6.5 Auto-transformers, principle, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
6.6 Poly phase transformers, star and delta connection.
6.7 Phase and line vo~Itage and current their, inter-relation.
6.8 Transformer losses.
6.8.1 Coreloss.
6.8.2 Hysteressis loss.

7. PHOTO-AND THERMO-ELECTRICITY. 9 Hours

7.1 Photoelectric effects, Photo- emissive, conductive, and photovol tic phenomena.
7.2 Application of photoelectric effects.
7.3 Thermoelectricity - Thompson and see back effects.
7.4 Thermocouples, construction, materials and applications
7.5 Incandescent lamp, construction, rating and application
7.6 Fluorescent tube light, construction, working, rating and applications.

8. NETWORK TIIEOREMS. 5 Hours

8.1 Superposition theorem for complex circuits.
8.2 Calculation based on the superposition theorem.
8.3 Thevenin's Theorem circuits simplification.
8.4 Calculation base on the Thevenin's theorem.
8.5 Norton theorem and current source concept.
8.6 Calculation based on the Norton's Theorem.
8.7 Star and Delta transformation.
8.8 Calculation based on Star and Delta transformation.

43
9. RESONANCE. 6 Hours
9.1 Condition of resonance and resonant circuit.
9.2 Relation between f, L and C at resonance.
9.3 Series resonant circuit. Impedance of series resonant circuit.
9.4 Current, voltage and impedance characteristic of series resonant circuit.
9.5 Parallel resonant circuit and its impedance
9.6 Characteristics of~impedance, current and voltage of a parallel resonant circuit
9.7 Series and parallel resonance curve comparison and Bandwidth.
9.8 Q of circuit, Effect of Q on the slope and width of the resonance curves.
9.9 Relation between the slope of the resonance curve on selectivity.
9.10 Effect of the L.C. ratio on selectivity.
9.11 Use of resonance circuit in radio and TV receivers.

10. FILTER & COUPLING CIRCUITS 9 Hours

10.1 Purpose and action of a filter circuit.
10.2 Principle of filter action.
10.3 Types of filter circuit LPF, HPF, K filter and m drive filter.
10.4 Band Pass filter (13PF) Band Stop filter (BSF)
10.5 Power supply filter.
10.6 Purpose and action of coupling circuit.
10.7 Coefficient of coupling and coupled irnpedu~ce.
10.8 Type of coupling, RC1 Impedance transformer coupling.
10.9 Delay action circuits, R-L and R-C circuits.
10.10 Time constant of R-L & R-C circuits and its importance in rise and fall of circuit current
and voltage.

11. SEMICONDUCTORS. 8 Hours

11.1 Semiconductor theory
11.1.1 Doping, doping level and methods.
11.1.2 PN Junction diode, Depletion region and junction potential.
11.1.3 Diode as rectifier.
11.1.4 Transistor, types ~NP and NPN)
11.1.5 Transistor as amplifier.
11.1.6 Integrated circuits types, analog and digital.

TEXT/REEERENCE BOOKS.
1. Grob, Bernard, Basic Electronics, Sixth Edition.
2. Slurzberg, Orested, Essentials of Electricity for Radio and TV.
3. Theija, B.L. Electrical Technology.
4. Slurzberg, Essentials of Radio.

44
EI.T-114 ELECTRICAL ESSENTIALS AND NETWORKS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. BASIC PRINCIPLE OF ELECTRICITY.

1.1 Understand electron theory.
1.1.1 Describe the structure of atom.
1.1.2 Describe the K, L, and M shells.
1.1.3 Describe energy level.
1.1.4 Describe valence electron.
1.1.5 Explain energy bands with reference to conductors, insulators & semiconductors.

1.2 Understand Electrical Quantities

1.2.1 Describe potential, current & resistance
1.2.2 Describe units of potential, current & resistance
1.2.3 Differentiate between conventional current and electron current.

2. DC FUNDAMENTALS.
2.1 Understand Ohm's Law.
2.1.1 Define ohm's law
2.2.2 Solve problems on Ohm's law

2.2 Understand Laws of Resistance

2.2.1 Define specific resistance
2.2.2 Define conductor
2.2.3 Define conductivity
2.2.4 Explain the effect of temperature on resistance
2.2.5 Explain coefficient of resistance
2.2.6 Solve problems on R=PLIA and Rt=Ro(l +xt).
2.2.7 Describe the resistance in series
2.2.8 Describe the resistance in parallel
2.2.9 Describe the resistance in series-parallel
2.2.10 Calculate the combination of resistances and cells, Rt, I & V.
2.2.11 Define power and energy
2.2.l2 Describe units of power and energy
2.2.13 Explain the power dissipation in resistors

2.3 Understand Kirchhoffs' Laws

2.3.1 Define Kirchhoff's laws
2.3.2 Solve problems using Kirchhoff voltage law
2.3.3 Solve problems using kirchhoff current law

2.4 Understand Resistors

2.4.1 Define resistance and resistor
2.4.2 List types of resistors
2.4.3 Enlist use of resistors
2.4.4 Describe resistor colour codes
2.4.5 Describe power rating of resistor

2.5 Understand Batteries

2.5.1 Name types of D.C source
2.5.2 Describe types of cells (Mercury, Silver oxide, Nickel cadmium)
2.5.3 Describe lead acid battery
2.5.4 Describe solar cells
2.5.5 Explain the internal resistance of cell
2.5.6 Use cells in series and parallel of voltage and constant source of current

45
3. MAGNETlSM & ELECTROMAGNETISM
3.1 Understand magnetism
3.1 1 Describe lines of force1 flux, flux density, permeability, reactance & their units
3.1.2 Explain properties of magnetic lines of force
3.1.3 Describe types of magnets
3.1.4 Explain magnetic properties of materials
3.1.5 Define and list ferromagnetic, paramagnetic and diamagnetic materials.
3.1.6 Describe magnetic induction.

3.2 To understand electromagnetism

3.2.1 Describe electromagnetism
3.2.2 Describe magneto-motive force
3.2.3 Describe field intensity (HATIL)
3.2.4 DrawB-HCurve
3.2.5 Explain B-H curve
3.2.6 Describe magnetic hystersis
3.2.7 Explain electromagnetic induction
3.2.8 Explain magnetic field around a current carrying conductor
3.2.9 Define inductor
3.2.10 Write formula for inductance base on physical parameters of an inductor
(L= Ur x (N)* x A / L]
3.2.11 Solve problem using the above formula for inductor
3.2.12 Describe solenoids
3.2.13 Describe cork screw rule and left hand rule
3.2.14 Explain force between two magnetic fields and motor action
3.2.15 Define Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction ( e = N dO/dt)
3.2.16 Define Lenz's Law.

4. ELECTROSTATICS.
4.1 Understand electro~tatics
4.1.1 Describe principle of electrostatic charges
4.1.2 Explain the effect of negative & positive charges
4.1.3 Describe the laws of electrostatics
4.1.4 Describe electrostatic induction & field strength
4.1.5 Explain properties of electric lines of force
4.1.6 Compare between electric lines of force and magnetic lines of force
4.1.7 Describe dielectric & dielectric strength/dielectric constant
4.1.8 Describe the importance of dielectric & dielectric strength
4.1.9 Describe capacitor and capacitance
4.1.10 Describe breakdown voltage
4.1.11 Describe the capacitance of parallel plate capacitor
4.1.12 Describe types of capacitors
4.1.13 Describe the use of capacitors
4.1.14 Calculate total capacitance in series in parallel and series-parallel combination
4.1.15 Explain the energy stored in capacitor
4.1.16 Describe the colour coding, tolerance and voltage rating of capacitors
4.1.17 Describe the troubles in capacitors

5. AC FUNDAMENTALS.
5.1 Understand A.C Waveform
5.1.1 Describe sine wave (cycle, wave length, period, frequency and their units)
5.1.2 Draw AC sine waveform (sinusoidal, square, sawtooth)
5.1.3 Describe Instantaneous value, peek value, average value, r.m.s. value, effective
value and their inter-relation

46
 5.1.4 Describe Audio and Radio frequencies and their wavelemgths
5.1.5 Draw the electromagnetic wave spectrum
5.1.6 Define harmonic and fundamental wave

5.2 Understand AC circuits

5.2.1 Describe AC through resistors
5.2.2 Describe phase angle, in phase & out of phase. waves
5.2.3 Describe phase lag, lead & power factor
5.2.4 Calculate voltage, current & power(v,i,w) for resistive circuit
5.2.5 Describe AC through inductance using waveforms and phasor diagram
5.2.6 Define self inductance & self induced voltage
5.2.7 Explain inductive reactance (Xl -21 ifi), phase relation between voltage & current
5.2.8 Draw its phasor diagram
5.2.9 Calculate power for pure inductor
5.2.10 Explain AC through R-L series circuit
5.2.11 Draw phasor diagram for R-L series circuit
5.2.12 Calculate power factor for R-L series circuit
5.2.13 Calculate time constant for LIR
5.2.14 Define impedance
5.2.15 Draw impedance triangle
5.2.16 Explain AC through R-L parallel circuit
5.2.17 Calculate inductive reactance for inductors
5.2.18 Describe skin~ effect
5.2.19 Describe audio frequency chokes
5.2.20 Describe radio frequency chokes
5.2.21 Explain ac through pure capacitor
5.2.22 Explain phase relation between through capacitors
5.2.23 Calculate capacitive reactance (112 II f c)
5.2.24 Explain AC through R-C series circuit
5.2.25 Explain time constant for R-C series circuit
5.2.26 Explain AC through R-C parallel_circuit
5.2.27 Calculate capacitive reactance for series parallel combination
5.2.28 Explain AC through RLC series circuit
5.2.29 Explain phase relation
5.2.30 Calculate power for RLC series circuit
5.2.31 Explain real power ( VI Cos 0), apparent
5.2.32 Calculate power factor

6. TRANSFORMER.
6.1 Understand the transformers
6.1.1 Explain the principle of transformer
6.1.2 Define mutual induction
6.1.3 Define coefficient of mutual induction
6.1.4 Describe turn ratio of transformer
6.1.5 Describe construction of transformer
6.1.6 Enlist the types of transformer
6.1.7 Enlist core material of transformer
6.1.8 Describe auto transformer
6.1.9 Explain star, delta connections of three phase transformer
6.1.10 Explain phase & line voltage for star and delta connection
6.1.11 Explain phase & line current for star and delta connection of three phase system
6.1.12 List the applications of transformer in electronics:
i) step down transformer,
ii) impedance matching
iii) coupling

47
 6.1.13 Explain transformer losses.
6.1.14 Explain hysteresis loss and core loss.

7. PHOTO AND THERMO-ELECTRICITY

7.1 Understand photo and thermo-ectricity
7.1.1 Describe photoelectric effects (photo emissive, photo conductive and photo
voltaic effects)
7.1.2 Name the applications of photoelectric effect
7.1.3 Explain thermoelectric effect (Thompson & See-beck effects)
7.1.4 Explain thermocouples
7.1.5 Draw the diagram of incandescent lamp
7.1.6 Explain the working 9f incandescent lamp
7.1.7 Draw the diagram of fluorescent tube light
7.1.8 Explain the working of fluorescent tube light

8. NETWORK THEOREMS.
8.1 Understand Superposition, Thevenin & Norton theorems
8.1.1 Explain Superposition theorem
8.1.2 Solve problems based on superposition theorem
8.1.3 Explain Thevenin's theorem
8.1.4 Solve problems based on Thevenin's theorem
8.1.5 Explain Norton's theorem
8.1.6 Solve problems based on Norton's theorem
8.1.7 Explain transformation of star to delta and delta to star netwQrks
8.1.8 Solve problenis based on star, delta transformation

9. RESONANCE.
9.1 Understand resonance
9.1.1 Explain resonance
9.1.2 Explain the relation between frequency, inductance & capacitance at resonant
9.1.3 Draw the series resonant circuit
9.1.4 Explain series resonant circuit
9.1.5 Draw the characteristics of series resonant circuit
9.1.6 Calculate current, voltage and impedance of series resonant circuit
9.1.7 Draw the diagram of parallel resonant circuit
9.1.8 Explain the parallel resonant circuit
9.1.9 Draw the characteristics of paraljel resonant circuit
9.1.10 Compare series and parallel resonant circuit
9.1.11 Describe the band width of a resonant circuit
9.1.12 Describe Q of a circuit
9.1.13 Explain the effect of the L.C ratio on selectivity
9.1.14 Enlist the use of resonant circuit in radio and TV receivers

10. FiLTERS AND COUPLING CIRCUITS.

10.1 Understand filters & coupling circuits
10.1.1 Explain purpose & action of a filter circuit
10.1.2 Enlist the types of filter circuits
10.1.3 Explain low pass filter high pass filter, K-filter & m-drived filters
10.1.4 Explain band pass filter & band stop filter
10.1.5 Explain action & purpose of a coupling circuit
10.1.6 Define coefficient of coupling
10.1.7 Enlist types o(coupling
10.1.8 Explain RC, impedance, and transformer coupling
10.1.9 Define time constant of R-L & R-C Circuits
10.1.10 Explain importance of rise and fall of circuit current and voltage in
reactive circuit.

48
11. SEMICONDUCTORS.
11.1 Understand semiconductor
11.1.1 Describe semiconductor theory
11.1.2 Describe doping, doping level
11.1.3 Explain PN junction diode
11.1.4 Describe depletion region, junction potential, reverse bias & forward bias junction
11.1.5 Explain the application of diode as rectifier
11.1.6 Explain PN junctions as PNP transistor
11.1.7 Explain NP junctions as NPN transistor
11.1.8 Explain the application of transistor as amplifier
11.1.9 Describe Integrated circuit(IC)
11.1.10 Enlist the types of Integrated circuit (Analog, digital).
11.1.11 Enlist the application of Integrated circuit

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Grob Bernard "Basic Electronics 6th Edition"
2. Slurzberg, Orested"Essentials of Electricity for radio & TV
3. Therja B.L. "Electrical Technology"
4. Slurzberg "Essentials of radio"
5. R.B. Faber "Applied Electricity & Electronics for technicians"

49
ELT 114: ELECTRICAL ESSENTIALS AND NETWORK

Total contact hours.

Practical: 96 Hours.

LIST OF PRACTICALS.

I. Study of Ammeter, Voltmeter and Multimeter.

2. a) Measurement of current, voltage and resistance.
b) Verification of Ohm's Law by:
Keeping the voltage constant. Keeping the resistance constant.
3. a) Verify the laws of series and parallel combination of
resistances by
I) Ohmmeter method.
ii) Voltmeter-Ammeter method.
4. Determine temperature coefficient of resistance.
5. Verify Kirchhoffs' laws.
6. a) Measurement of power by:
i) VoitmeterlAmmeter method.
ii) Wattmeter.
b) Measurement of Energy by:
i) Wattrneter and clock method.
ii) Energy meter.
7. a) Practice of resistor colour coding.
b) Use of potentiometer and Rheostat as voltage divider and current limiter.
8. Combine cells in series and parallel and verify the net voltage.
9. a) Study of lead acid battery, prac,tice and use of hydrometer and electrolyte preparation.
b) Practice charging of a lead acid battery.
10. a) Determine the internal resistance of a cell.
b) Study of E.M.F. of cell and measurement of their voltages.
11. Plot magnetic line of forces of bar magnets in different positions.
12. a) Study of the magnetic effect of a current carrying:
i) Conductor.
ii) coil.
b) Study the change in the Magnetic power of an Electromagnet by the introduction of
various cores in the coil.
13. Study of the effect on a current carrying conductor when placed in
a) magnetic field.
14. Verify Faraday's Laws of Electromagnetic induction.
15. a) Study of various types of capacitors and their colour coding.
b) Verify laws of combination of capacitors.
16. Observe capacitor charging and discharging.
17. Practice plotting sine wave for a given equation e= Em sine Q.
18. Study of sine wave on an oscilloscope and determine its peak, peek to peak, r.m.s. and average
values of current and voltage.
19. Determine of wave length, time period and frequency of a given AC signal by oscilloscope.
20. Determine the power factor of a given AC circuit using a power factor meter.
21. Study the principles of self and mutual induction in coils.
22. a) Determine the inductance of a choke coil.
b) Determine the capacitance of a capacitor by using digital LCR meter.
23. Determine phase relationship between voltage and current in inductive circuit by showing phase
difference between VR and VL using an oscilloscope.
24. Study the behaviour of inductance and capacitance with AC and DC supplies.

50
25. a) Determine active and reactive power in an AC circuit.
b) Calculate power factor for the above circuit.
26. a) Study of the frequency response of R.L.C. series circuit and resonance effect.
b) Study of the frequency response of R.L.C. parallel circuit and resonance effect.
27. a) Study of various type of transformers used in electronics field.
b) Study of single-phase transformer and determine its transformation ratio.
28. Practice of core assembly and winding of the core type transformers.
29. Study of photo-electric and photo-conductive effects using LDR Photo-Diode, solar Cell, LED.
30. a) Study of various type of incandescent and vapour lamps
b) Connect a fluorescent tube light.
31. Verify the line and phase values of current and voltage in star and delta connections.
32. a) Demonstration of diode as rectifier.
b) Demonstration of transistor as amplifier.

51
AT-113: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING

Total contact hours

Theory 64 Hours T P C
Practical 96 Hours 2 3 3

Pre-requisite None

AIMS To enable the learner to describe the organization of a Personal Computer (PC), use MS
DOS commands, use the Windows 95 (98/NT) Operating System, use MS WORD, use
MSEXCEL, use Electronics Workbench and Program in BASIC.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER HARDWARE 2 Hours

1.1 The block diagram of a PC.
1.2 State the purpose of the PC hardware components.
1.3 The connections of the major components to build an operating PC system.

2. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE 2 Hours

2.1 Booting the computer using a “System” DOS diskette.
2.2 Booting the computer using the hard disk.
2.3 How to use start (Programs) icon.
2.4 How to improve keyboarding skills with EXPERT TYPING for Windows.

3. INTRODUCTION TO MS DOS 4 Hours

3.1 The process of "Booting" the computer.
3.2 The identity of the major PC storage components.
3.3 The MS-DOS commands as being INTERNAL or EXTERNAL.
3.4 The use of MS-DOS commands.
3.5 The process of creating and saving files and directories.

4. INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS 95 (98/NT) 8 Hours

4.1 The nature of the Windows Operating System.
4.2 The features of Windows of Windows 95 (98/NT).
4.3 The process of backing up old files.
4.4 The process of setting up Windows 95 (98/NT).
4.5 The set up options.
4.6 Logging on to Windows.
4.7 The use of the Start Button and Task Bar.
4.8 The icons in the Start Menu.
4.9 Starting and Quitting a Program.
4.10 Opening a Document.
4.11 How to use the icons in the Start Menu.
4.12 How to use the My Computer Icon.
4.13 How to Organize Files and Folders and the use of Windows Explorer icon.
4.14 How to use the Printer Icon.
4.15 How to Set Up a printer.
4.16 How to Install Software.
4.17 How to Install Hardware.
4.18 Methods of using Windows more efficiently.
4.19 How to maintain your system.
4.20 How to Optimize your computer.
4.21 How to use Microsoft Explorer (Netscape).

52
5. INTRODUCTION TO MS WORD (OFFICE 97) 6 Hours
5.1 How to create a document using the features in MS-Word.
5.2 How to save a document.
5.3 How to retrieve and edit the saved document.

6. INTRODUCTION TO MS EXCEL (OFFICE 97) 6 Hours

6.1 How to create a document using the features in MS-EXCEL.
6.2 How to save a document.
6.3 How to retrieve and edit the saved document.

7. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC WORKBENCH 4 Hours

7.1 How to create a circuit by moving parts from the "parts bin", connecting components,
connecting and viewing measuring equipment, setting labels and component values and
activating the simulation.
7.2 How to save the simulation to diskette.
7.3 How to retrieve from diskette and edit the simulation.

8. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING FUNDEMENTALS 4 Hours

8.1 Define the terms program and programming.
8.2 Describe five steps in the programming process.
8.3 How a programmer goes about defining a problem.
8.4 Define the term algorithm, and explain how a programmer constructs an algorithm.
8.5 Structured or top down programming.
8.6 Testing and debugging procedure.
8.7 Syntax and logic errors.
8.8 How programmers document programs internally and externally.
8.9 On-line documentation.
8.10 What a programming language is.
8.11 The catagories of programming languages (generartion).
8.12 Examples of each generation of programming languages.

9. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING USING THE BASIC LANGUAGE 28 Hours

9.1 The differences between the various PC BASIC versions.
9.2 The procedure to start and exit BASIC Programming.
9.3 The function of the function keys while operating in BASIC
Programming.
9.4 The devices used by BASIC Programming.
9.5 The difference between command, statement and function.
9.6 Describe the following; Numeric, Strings and Arrays:
9.7 State the difference between variables and constants.
9.8 The various types of operators.
9.9 The various types of functions.
9.10 The usage of the command groups.
9.11 The the various flow control terms:
9.12 The use of the looping and decision statements.
9.13 Define the various array terms.
9.14 How to Dimension, Fill and Use arrays.
9.15 The various types of Sorts.
9.16 The QuickBASIC Metacommands.
9.17 The BASICstructures.
9.18 The usage of file and device I/O's.
9.19 The video modes used by BASIC Programming.
9.20 Describe line, bar, clustered bar and pie chart types.
9.21 The use of of the SCREEN Statement, COLOR Statement and PAINT
Statement.
9.22 The usage of graphics commands.

53
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. O. Parson, New Perspective on Computers.
2. F. Erickson and J. Vonk, Modern Microcomputers 2’nd Ed.
3. Mazidi, 80X86 IBM PC And Compatible Computers, Vol. I & II.
4. ABC's of DOS (latest release).
5. Judd Robbins, Mastering DOS 6.2, Second Ed.
6. J. Joyce, M. Moon, Microsoft Windows 98 At A Glance.
7. B. Livingston, D. Straub, Windows 98 Secrets.
8. Microsoft Press, Microsoft Office 97 At A Glance.
9. Ron S. Gottfrid, Programming with BASIC.
10. W. Zase, Programming With Microsoft BASIC, 2’nd Ed.
11. H. Peckman, BASIC A Hands-on Method.
12. P. Fanzone, Quick BASIC 4.5.

54
AT-113 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER HARDWARE

1.1 Explain the block diagram of a PC.
1.2 Identify and state the purpose of each of the following components;
i. Monitor
ii. Keyboard
iii. Motherboard
iv. Power supply
v. ROM
vi. RAM
vii. Hard disk drive
viii. Floppy disk drive
ix. Mouse
x. Printer
xi. Ports
xii. Floppy diskettes
xiii. Peripherals
1.3 Describe the connection of the major components to build an operating PC system.

2. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER APPLICATION SOFTWARE

2.1 Explain the "Booting" the computer using a “System” DOS diskette.
2.2 Explain "Booting" the computer using the hard disk.
2.3 Explain how to use Start (Programs) menu to open;
i. Operating Systems (DOS)
ii. Word Processors (MS-Word)
iii. Spreadsheets (MSEXCEL)
iv. Databases (MSEXCEL)
v. Simulation Software (Electronics Workbench)
2.4 Explain how to improve keyboarding skills with EXPERT TYPING for Windows.

3. INTRODUCTION TO DISK OPERATING SYSTEMS

3.1 Explain the process of "Booting" the computer.
3.2 Explain the identity of the major PC storage components as;
i. A drive
ii. B drive
iii. C drive
iv. D drive
3.3 Describe the MS-DOS commands as being INTERNAL or EXTERNAL.
3.4 Explain the use of the following MS-DOS commands;
i. Format
ii. Label
iii. Copy
iv. Delete
v. Diskcopy
vi. Xcopy
vii. Chkdsk
viii. Rename
ix. Directory
x. Make Directory
xi. Remove Directory
xii. Change Directory
xiii. Date

55
 xiv. Time
xv. Prompt
3.5. Describe the process of creating and saving files and directories.

4. INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS 95 (98/NT) OPERATING SYSTEM

4.1 Describe the nature of the Windows Operating System.
4.2 Describe the following features of Windows of Windows 95 (98/NT);
i. User Interface
ii. Windows Explorer (Netscape)
iii. Long Filenames
iv. Improved Game and Multimedia Support
v. Plug and Play hardware compatibility
vi. 32 bit preemptive multitasking
vii. Microsoft Exchange
viii. Microsoft Network
4.3 Explain the process of backing up old files.
4.4 Explain the process of setting up Windows 95 (98/NT).
4.5 Describe the following set up options;
i. Typical
ii. Portable
iii. Compact
iv. Custom
4.6 Describe logging on to Windows.
4.7 Explain the use of the Start Button and Task Bar.
4.8 Describe the following icons in the Start Menu;
i. Programs
ii. Documents
iii. Settings
iv. Find
v. Help
vi. Run
vii. Shut Down
4.9 Explain Starting and Quitting a Program.
4.10 Explain Opening a Document.
4.11 Explain how to use the following icons in the Start Menu;
i. Find
ii. Settings
iii. Run
iv. Shut Down
v. Programs
4.12 Explain how to use the My Computer Icon.
4.13 Explain how to Organize Files and Folders and the use of Windows Explorer icon.
4.14 Explain how to use the Printer Icon.
4.15 Describe how to Set Up a printer.
4.16 Explain how to Install Software.
4.17 Explain how to Install Hardware.
4.18 Describe methods of using Windows more efficiently.
4.19 Explain how to Maintain your system.
4.20 Describe how to Optimize your computer.
4.21 Describe how to use Microsoft Explorer (Netscape).

5. INTRODUCTION TO MS WORD
5.1 Explain how to create a document in MS-Word using the following features;
i. Bolding
ii. Underlining
iii. Centering

56
 iv. Italics
v. Line Spacing
vi. Page Numbering
vii. Headers and Footers
viii. Justification
ix. Margins
x. Use of Show/Hide
xi. Selecting text
xii. Moving text
xiii. Copying text
xiv. Cut and Paste
xv. Use of Speller
xvi. Print Preview
xvii. Print
xviii. Retrieving graphics
xix. Editing graphics
xx. Append text or graphics to documents
5.2 Explain how to save a document.

5.3 Explain how to retrieve and edit the saved document.

6. INTRODUCTION TO MS-EXCEL
6.1 Explain how to create a document in MS-EXCEL using the following features;
i. Bolding
ii. Underlining
iii. Centering
iv. Italics
v. Use of columns and rows
vi. Sheet Numbering
vii. Use of formulas
viii. Data Entry
ix. Editing
x. Use of Show/Hide
xi. Selecting Data
xii. Moving Data
xiii. Copying Data
xiv. Cut and Paste
xv. Use of Chart Wizard
xvi. Print Preview
xvii. Print
xviii. Retrieving plots
xix. Editing plots
xx. Append text or plots to documents
6.2 Explain how to save a document.
6.3 Explain how to retrieve and edit the saved document.
6.4. Retrieve and edit the document using the following:
i. Editing
ii. Use of Show/Hide
iii. Selecting Data
iv. Moving Data
v. Copying Data
vi. Cut and Paste
vii. Use of Chart Wizard
viii. Print Preview
ix. Print
x. Retrieving plots

57
 xi. Editing plots
6.5. Plot a line graph, bar chart and pie chart using the chart wizard.

7. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS WORKBENCH

7.1 Explain how to create a circuit as specified in the manual.
i. Move parts from the "parts bin".
ii. Connect components.
iii. Connect and view measuring equipment.
iv. Set labels and component values.
v. Activate the simulation.
7.2 Explain how to save the simulation to diskette.
7.3 Explain how to retrieve from diskette and edit the simulation.

8. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

8.1 Define the terms program and programming.
8.2 Describe five steps in the programming process.
8.3 Explain how a programmer goes about defining a problem.
8.4 Define the term algorithm, and explain how a programmer constructs an algorithm.
8.5 Explain structured or top down programming.
8.6 Describe the testing and debugging procedure.
8.7 Explain syntax and logic error.
8.8 Explain how programmers document programs internally and externally.
8.9 Explain on-line documentation.
8.10 Explain what a programming language is.
8.11 Describe the catagories of programming languages (generartion).
8.12 List examples of each generation of programming languages.

9. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING USING THE BASIC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE

9.1 Describe the differences between the various PC BASIC versions.
9.2 Describe the procedure to start and exit BASIC Programming.
9.4 Describe the function of the function keys while operating in BASIC
Programming.
9.4 Describe the devices used by BASIC Programming.
9.5 State the difference between command, statement and function.
9.6 Describe the following; Numeric, Strings and Arrays;
i. Numeric
ii. String
iii. Array
9.7 State the difference between variables and constants.
9.8 Explain the following types of operators;
i. Arithmetic
ii. Relational
iii. Logical
iv. Functional
v. String
9.9 Describe the following types of functions;
i. Numeric
ii. String
iii. User
9.10 Explain the usage of commands within the following command groups;
i. Input and output
ii. Loop and decision
iii. Proceedures
iv. Graphic
9.11 Define the following terms;Loop
i. Decision

58
 ii. Conditional branch/Unconditional branch
iii. Subroutine
9.12 Describe the use of the looping and decision statements.
9.13 Define the following terms:
i. Numeric array
ii. String array
iii. Dimension
iv. Subscript
9.14 Explain how to Dimension, Fill and Use arrays.
9.15 Explain the following Sorts;
i. Bubble sort
ii. Shell sort
iii. Sequential sort
9.16 Describe the QuickBASIC Metacommands;
9.17 Explain the following BASICstructures:
i. User-defined functions
ii. Functions (FUNCTION)
iii. Subroutines (GOSUB)
iv. Callable subroutines (SUB)
9.18 Explain the usage of file and device I/O's;
i. Sequential files
ii. Random access files
iii. Binary files and Ports
9.19 Describe the video modes used by BASIC Programming;
i. Graphics Display Adapter Terms
ii. Graphics Modes
9.20 Describe the following chart types;
i. Line
ii. Bar
iii. Clustered bar
iv. Pie
9.21 Explain the use of;
i. SCREEN Statement
ii. COLOR Statement
iii. PAINT Statement
9.22 Explain the usage of graphics commands;
i. LINE Statement
ii. CIRCLE Statement
iii. DRAW Statement

59
AT-113 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING

LIST OF PRACTICALS

1. Draw a block diagram of a PC.

2. Correctly identify and state the purpose of each of the following components;
i. Monitor
ii. Keyboard
iii. Motherboard
iv. Power supply
v. ROM
vi. RAM
vii. Hard disk drive
viii. Floppy disk drive
ix. Mouse
x. Printer
xi. Ports
xii. Floppy diskettes
xiii. Peripherals
3. Safely connect the major components to build an operating PC system.
4. "Boot" the computer using a “System” DOS diskette.
5. "Boot" the computer using the hard disk.
6. Use Start (Programs) menu to open;
i. Operating Systems (DOS)
ii. Word Processors (MS-Word)
iii. Spreadsheets (MSEXCEL)
iv. Databases (MSEXCEL)
v. Simulation Software (Electronics Workbench)
7. Use EXPERT TYPING for Windows to improve keyboarding skills.
8. "Boot" the computer.
9. Identify the major PC storage components as;
i. A drive
ii. B drive
iii. C drive
iv. D drive
10. Identify MS-DOS commands as being INTERNAL or EXTERNAL.
11. Use the following MS-DOS commands;
i. Format
ii. Label
iii. Copy
iv. Delete
v. Diskcopy
vi. Xcopy
vii. Chkdsk
viii. Rename
ix. Directory
x. Make Directory
xi. Remove Directory
xii. Change Directory
xiii. Date
xiv. Time
xv. Prompt
12. Create and save files and directories.
13. Use the Start Button and Task Bar

60
14. Use the following icons in the Start Menu

i. Find
ii. Settings
iii. Run
iv. Shut Down
v. Programs
15. Use the My Computer Icon.
16. Organize Files and Folders and the use of Windows Explorer icon.
17. Use the Printer Icon.
18. Set Up a printer.
19. Install Software.
20. Install Hardware.
21. Use Windows more efficiently using explorer or my computer.
22. Maintain your system using scandisk and file maintenance.
23. Optimize your computer using the disk defragment utility.
24. Use Microsoft Explorer or Netscape.
25. Create a document in MS-Word using the following;
i. Bolding
ii. Underlining
iii. Centering
iv. Italics
v. Line Spacing
vi. Page Numbering
vii. Headers and Footers
viii. Justification
ix. Margins
x. Use of Show/Hide
xi. Use of Speller
26. Save the document.
27. Retrieve and edit the document using the following;
i. Selecting text
ii. Moving text
iii. Copying text
iv. Cut and Paste
v. Print Preview
vi. Print
vii. Retrieving graphics
viii. Editing graphics
ix. Append text or graphics to documents
28. Create a document in MS-EXCEL using the following;
i. Bolding
ii. Underlining
iii. Centering
iv. Italics
v. Use of columns and rows
vi. Sheet Numbering
vii. Use of formulas
viii. Data Entry
ix. Use of Chart Wizard
29. Save the document.
30. Retrieve and edit the document using the following;
i. Editing
ii. Use of Show/Hide
iii. Selecting Data
iv. Moving Data

61
 v. Copying Data
vi. Cut and Paste
vii. Use of Chart Wizard
viii. Print Preview
ix. Print
x. Retrieving plots
xi. Editing plots
31. Plot a line graph, bar chart and pie chart using the chart wizard.
32. Simulate a circuit as specified in a Lab manual.
i. Move parts from the "parts bin"
ii. Connect components
iii. Connect and view measuring equipment
iv. Set labels and component values
v. Activate the simulation
33. Save the simulation to diskette.
34. Retrieve from diskette and edit the simulation.
35. Use the five steps in the programming process to design a program that will keep the
temperature of a control room at 30 degrees Celcius
36. Develop an algorithm to make a cup of tea.
37. Using the algorithm developed in 36, design a structured or top down programme for
the algorithm developed.
38. Test the program structure developed in 37 for logic errors.
39. Document the program developed in 37 using;
1. The appropriate template, the student will draw a flowchart for a given problem.
2. The following lab execises and the function keys, the student will perform
appropriate BASIC Programming.
3. The appropriate programming manuals, the student will perform the following
tasks:
i. Design a program
ii. Write a program
iii. Enter/Compile the program
iv. Debug the program
v. Execute the program

62
AT-121 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT

Total contact hours T P C

Theory: 32 Hours 1 0 1

Pre-requisite: None

AIMS: After completing the course the students will be able to understand the costs associated
with occupational injuries and ways to develop positive attitudes towards occupational
health and safety issues.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. PROMOTING HEALTH AND SAFETY 4 Hours

1.1. The Occupational Health and Safety (OH&S) program.
1.2. The essential components of a health and safety policy
1.3. The basic concepts to risk management.

2. MECHANICAL HAZARDS 2 Hours

2.1. Mechanical Hazards of power-driven tools and Machines
2.2. Types of Injuries.
2.3 Requirements and types of machine safeguards.
2.4 Lockout/tagout system.

3. FALLING, IMPACT, ACCELERATUION, AND LIFTING HAZARDS 2 Hours

3.1 Causes of falls and categories.
3.2 Elements of slip and fall prevention programmes.
3.3 Recommended procedures for ladder safety.
3.4 Impact and acceleration hazards.
3.5 Lifting hazards and their relation to back injuries.
3.6 Materials handling, both manual and mechanical.

4. ELECTRICAL HAZARDS 2 Hours

4.1 Sources of electrical hazards.
4.2 Effects of electricity on humans.
4.3 Methods of reducing electrical hazards.
4.4 Steps to be taken to assist a victim of electric shock.

5 FIRE HAZARDS 2 Hours

5.1 Sources of fire hazards.
5.2 Methods of reducing fire hazards.
5.3 Emergency procedures and means of escape.
5.4 Classification of fire extinguisher.

6. CHEMICAL HAZARDS 4 Hours

6.1. Occupational diseases and illnesses.
6.2. Agents which can cause disease and illness.
6.3. Three routes of entry of chemicals into the body.
6.4 Classification of effects of substances.
7. PHYSICAL HAZARDS 4 Hours
7.1 Noise.
7.2 Vibration.
7.3 Heat Stress.
7.4 Radiation.
7.5 Lasers
7.5 Lighting

63
8. CONFINED SPACES HAZARDS 2 Hours
8.1 Characteristics of a confined space.
8.2 Hazards involved in confined spaces.
8.3 Safety measures to be taken while working in confined spaces.

9. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 4 Hours

9.1 Head protectors.
9.2 Types of protection for the feet.
9.3 Protection for hands and arms.
9.4 Protection of the eyes and face in various applications.
9.5 Types of hearing protection.
9.6 Respiratory protection.

10. ACCIDENT PREVENTION 4 Hours

10.1 Stages of an accident investigation and analysis.
10.2 The importance of good house-keeping in a workplace.
10.3 The essential sections of a Material “Safety Data Sheet.
10.4 Safe handling and storage of chemicals.

11. FIRST AID 2 Hours

11.1 ABCs of First Aid.
11.2 First Aid training program.
11.3 Contents of a typical First Aid kit.
11.4 MSDS

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Proctor & Huges, Chemical Hazards of the Workplace, 4th edition, Hathaway, Proctor,
Huges (Van Nostran Reinhold).
2. Sax’s Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials, 9th Edition, Lewis (Van Nostrand
Reinhold).
3. The occupational Environment-Its Evaluation and control, Editor Dinardi (AIHA Press).
4. Basic Industrial Hygiene-A Training Manual, Brief (AIHA).
5. Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety, 4th edition, (ILO).
6. Handbook of Industrial Solvents, Latest Edition, (Alliance of American Insurers).
7. Fundamentals of Occupational Safety and Health, Kohn, Friend, Winterberger.

64
AT-121 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. PROMOTING HEALTH AND SAFETY

1.1. Outline the reasons for an Occupational Health and Safety (OH&S) program.
1.2. Illustrate the essential components of a health and safety policy
1.3. Realize the benefits of rules and regulations on OH&S.

2. MECHANICAL HAZARDS
2.1 Identify mechanical hazards of power-driven tools and machines
2.2 Describe types of injuries that can be caused by these tools and machines.
2.3 Requirements and types of machine safeguards.
2.4 Explain what a lockout/tagout system is.

3. FALLING, IMPACT ACCELERATION, AND LIFTING HAZARDS

3.1 List causes of falls and categorize them
3.2 Outline key elements of slip and fall prevention programs
3.3 Discuss recommended procedures for ladder safety
3.4 Describe impact and acceleration hazards
3.5 Identify lifting hazards and their relation to back injuries
3.6 Discuss materials handling, both manual and mechanical

4. ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
4.1 Describe soures of electrical hazards.
4.2 Describe the effects of electricity on humans
4.3 Describe some methods of reducing electrical hazards
4.4 Outline steps to be taken to assist a victim of electric shock

5. FIRE HAZARDS
3.1. Describe sources of fire hazards.
3.2. Describe methods of reducing fire hazards.
3.3. Describe emergency procedures and means of escape.
3.4. Describe the fire extinguisher classifications.

6. CHEMICAL HAZARDS
6.1 Describe occupational diseases and illnesses
6.2 Define, with some of their properties, agents which can cause disease and illness
6.3 Explain the three routes of entry of chemicals into the body
6.4 Describe classification of effects of substances.

7. PHYSICAL HAZARDS
7.1 Describe typical methods of controlling exposure to noise.
7.2 Explain typical methods of control of vibrations.
7.3 Describe the effects of radiation on humans and outline exposure control.
7.4 Describe typical effects of lasers on humans and outline exposure control.
7.5 Explain common problems of lighting and their effects.
7.6 Describe illnesses that can be caused by heat stress and discuss its control.

8. CONFINED SPACES HAZARDS

8.1 Discuss the characteristics of a confined space.
8.2 Explain the hazards involved in confined spaces.
8.3 Describe safety measures to be taken while working in confined spaces.

65
9. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
9.1 Describe head protectors.
9.2 Describe various types of protection for the feet.
9.3 Describe protection for hands and arms.
9.4 Describe protection of the eyes and face in various applications.
9.5 Describe different types of hearing protection.
9.6 Outline safe handling and storage of chemicals.

10. ACCIDENT PREVENTION

10.1 Outline stages of an accident investigation and analysis.
10.2 Explain the importance of good house-keeping in a workplace.
10.3 Outline the essential sections of a Material Safety Data Sheet.
10.4 Discuss safe handling and storage of chemicals.

11. FIRST AID

11.1 State the ABCs of First Aid.
11.2 List the essential activities of a basic First Aid training program.
11.3 List the contents of a typical First Aid kit.
11.4 Recognize an MSDS as a source of information about First Aid.

66
AT-131 AUTOMATION FUNDAMENTALS - I
T P C
Total contact hours: 1 0 1
Theory: 32 Hours

Pre-requisite: Successful completion of EL.T-114.

AIMS: After studying the subject the student will be able to:

Explain the latest techniques and innovations in factory automations.

Apply the most applicable plan for an industry.
Describe tools and techniques used in the design of automated systems.
Explain the principles of JIT, CAD/CAM, dedicated vs. flexible automation, flexible
workcells, systems installation, systems commissioning, flexible manufacturing, control
systems,I/O facilities, “E-stop” facilities.
investigate various automated systems and the service and maintenance there of.

1. INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION. 5 Hours

1.1 Purpose of Automation.
1.2 Economic Justification of Automation.
1.3 Quality and Automation.
1.4 Designing for Automation.
1.5 Hard Automation
1.6 Flexible Automation.

2. BUILDING BLOCKS OF AUTOMATION. 7 Hours

2.1 Types of sensors:
2.1.1 Manual Switches
2.1.2 Limit Switches
2.1.3 Proximity Switches
2.1.4 Photoelectric Sensors
2.1.5 Infrared Sensors
2.1.6 Fiber Optics
2.1.7 Lasers
2.2 Types of Analyzers:
2.2.1 Computers
2.2.2 Counters
2.2.3 Timers
2.2.4 Bar Code Readers
2.2.5 Optical Encoders
2.3 Types of Actuators
2.3.1 Cylinders
2.3.2 Solenoids
2.3.3 Relays
2.4 Types of Drives
2.4.1 Motors
2.4.2 Stepper Motors
2.4.3 DC Servo Motors
2.4.4 Kinematic Linkages
2.4.5 Genevas
2.4.6 Walking Beams

67
3. MANUFACTURING AUTOMATION STRATEGY. 5 Hours
3.1 Prerequisite to Automation:
3.2 Factory Automation.
3.3 Automation Project.
3.4 From Strategy to Results.

4. MECHANIZATION OF PARTS HANDLING. 5 Hours

4.1 Parts Feeding:
4.1.1 Parts Source Compatibilty
4.1.2 Motion and Transfer
4.1.3 Orientation Selection and Rejection
4.2 Parts Feeding Research:
4.2.1 Selector Efficiency
4.2.2 Efficiency versus Effectiveness
4.2.3 Part Wear and Damage
4.2.4 Food Product Orientation
4.2.5 Partial Automation

5. AUTOMATIC PRODUCTION AND ASSEMBLY 5 Hours

5.1 Assembly Machines:
5.1.1 Automatic Screwdrivers
5.1.2 Indexing Machines
5.2 Production and Throughput:
5.2.1 Machine Jamming
5.2.2 Component Quality Control
5.2.3 Defective Component Assembly
5.3 Buffer Storage.

6. AUTOMATED MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS. 5 Hours

6.1 Methods of Moving Materials:
6.2 Automated Storage Systems.
6.3 Timely Control Systems.
6.4 Application of Identification Methods.
6.5 Automated Guided Vehicle Systems.
6.6 Advantages and Disadvantages of Guidance Technology.
6.7 Types of Wheel Geometries.
6.8 On-Board Vehicle and Central Control Systems.
6.9 Use of AGV’s

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robots and Manufacturing Automation, C.Ray Asfahl, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Flexible Manufacturing Manufacturing, David Parrish, Butterworth Heinemann.
3. Logical Design of Automation Sytems, Sander B. Friedman, Prentice-Hall International Edition.
4. Advanced Manufacturing Methods, Jerome H. Fuchs, CMC, Prentice Hall.

68
AT-131 AUTOMATION FUNDAMENTALS - I

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION.
1.1 Explain the purpose of Automation.
1.2 Describe the economic Justification of Automation.
1.3 Explain why Quality and Automation go hand in hand.
1.4 Explain how Designing for Automation effect produtibility and assemblability.
1.5 Explain the term Hard Automation
1.6 Describe Flexible Automation.

2. BUILDING BLOCKS OF AUTOMATION.

2.1 Explain different types of Sensors:
2.1.1 Manual Switches
2.1.2 Limit Switches
2.1.3 Proximity Switches
2.1.4 Photoelectric Sensors
2.1.5 Infrared Sensors
2.1.6 Fiber Optics
2.1.7 Lasers
2.2 Describe different types of Analyzers:
2.2.1 Computers
2.2.2 Counters
2.2.3 Timers
2.2.4 Bar Code Readers
2.2.5 Optical Encoders
2.3 Explain different types of Actuators
2.3.1 Cylinders
2.3.2 Solenoids
2.3.3 Relays
2.4 Describe different types of Drives
2.4.1 Motors
2.4.2 Stepper Motors
2.4.3 DC Servo Motors
2.4.4 Kinematic Linkages
2.4.5 Genevas
2.4.6 Walking Beams

3. MANUFACTURING AUTOMATION STRATEGY.

3.1 Explain Strategy is the key prerequisite to Automation:
3.2 Explain why computer is the core of factory Automation.
3.3 Describe how to begin an Automation Project.
3.4 From Strategy to Results: Explain how to plan for profit and allocate resources effectively.

4. MECHANIZATION OF PARTS HANDLING.

4.1 Explain the requisites for Parts Feeding:
4.1.1 Parts Source Compatibilty
4.1.2 Motion and Transfer
4.1.3 Orientation Selection and Rejection
4.2 Explain the precise design parameters for Parts Feeding:
4.2.1 Selector Efficiency
4.2.2 Efficiency versus Effectiveness
4.2.3 Part Wear and Damage

69
 4.2.4 Food Product Orientation
4.2.5 Partial Automation

5. AUTOMATIC PRODUCTION AND ASSEMBLY

5.1 Explain types of Assembly Machines:
5.1.1 Automatic Screwdrivers
5.1.2 Indexing Machines
5.2 Explain the relation between Production and Throughput:
5.2.1 Machine Jamming
5.2.2 Component Quality Control
5.2.3 Defective Component Assembly
5.3 Describe Buffer Storage.

6. AUTOMATED MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS.

6.1 Describe Methods of Moving Materials:
6.2 Explain Trends in Automated Storage Systems.
6.3 Explain benefits of Timely Control Systems.
6.4 Describe Application of Identification Methods to Material Handling.
6.5 Explain Automated Guided Vehicle Systems.
6.6 Describe Advantages and Disadvantages of Seven Types of Guidance Technology.
6.7 Explain different Types of Wheel Geometries.
6.8 Explain the difference of operation between On-Board Vehicle and Central Control
Systems.
6.9 Describe Effective Use of AGV’s

70
2nd Year

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Phy-212 APPLIED MECHANICS

Total Contact Hours T P C

Theory 32 Hours 1 3 2
Practical 96 Hours

AIMS 1. Apply the concepts of Applied Physics to understand Mechanics

2. Apply laws and principles of Mechanics in solving technological problems
3. Use the knowledge of App. Mechanics in learning advance technical courses.
4. Demonstrate efficient skill of practical work in Mechanics Lab.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. MEASUREMENTS 2 Hours
1.1 Review: Dimensional formula of Equations of Motion
1.2 Review: Systems of measurement, S.I. Units, conversion
1.3 Significant Figures
1.4 Degree of accuracy

2. EQUILIBRIUM OF CON-CURRENT FORCES 3 Hours

2.1 Concurrent forces
2.2 Addition and Resolution of Vectors
2.3 Toggle Joint, Hanging Chains
2.4 Roof Trusses, Cranes.
2.5 Framed structures

3. MOMENTS AND COUPLES: 2 Hours

3.1 Principle of Moments - Review
3.2 Levers
3.3 Safety valve
3.4 Steel yard
3.5 Parallel forces, couple
3.6 Torque

4. EQUILIBRIUM OF NON CONCURRENT FORCES: 3 Hours

4.1 Non-concurrent forces
4.2 Free body diagram
4.3 Varignon's theorem
4.4 Conditions of total Equilibrium.
4.5 Ladders

5. MOMENT OF INERTIA: 3 Hours

5.1 Review: Rotational Inertia
5.2 Moment of Inertia, Theorems
5.3 Moment of Inertia of symmetrical bodies
5.4 M.I. of Fly wheel with applications
5.5 Energy stored by Flywheel

6. FRICTION: 2 Hours
6.1 Review: Laws of friction
6.2 Motion of body along an inclined plane (up & down)
6.3 Rolling friction & Ball Bearings
6.4 Fluid Friction, Stokes' Law

8
7. WORK, ENERGY AND POWER 3 Hours
7.1 Work-Energy relationship
7.2 Work done by variable force.
7.3 Power
7.4 I.H.P, B.H.P and Efficiency
7.5 Dynamometer.

8. TRANSMISSION OF POWER 3 Hours

8.1 Belts, Ropes.
8.2 Chains.
8.3 Gears.
8.4 Clutches, functions and types with application

9. MACHINES 3 Hours
9.1 Efficiency of machines
9.2 Inclined plane - Review
9.3 Reversibility of machines
9.4 Single purchase crab
9.5 Double purchase crab.
9.6 Worm and worm wheel.
9.7 Differential Screw Jack.
9.8 Differential Pulley, Wheel and Axle

10. VIBRATORY MOTION 2 Hours

10.1 S.H.M. - Review
10.2 Pendulums
10.3 Speed Governors.
10.4 Helical spring.
10.5 Cams
10.6 Quick return motion

11. ELASTICITY 3 Hours

11.1 Three Moduli of Elasticity
11.2 Loaded Beams, Types of Beam & Loads
11.3 Bending Stress
11.4 S.F & B.M diagram
11.5 Torsion and Torsional Stresses

12. SIMPLE MECHANISM 1 Hours

12.1 Introduction
12.2 Kinematic link or Element
12.3 Kinematic pair and types.
12.4 Kinematic chains and types.

13. VELOCITY IN MECHANISM 2 Hours

13.1 Introduction.
13.2 Instantaneous center.
13.3 Instantaneous velocity.
13.4 Velocity of a link by instantaneous center method.
13.5 Relative velocity of two bodies in the straight line
13.6 Velocity of a link by relative velocity method.

9
Phy 212 APPLIED MECHANICS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. USE THE CONCEPTS OF MEASUREMENT IN PRACTICAL SITUATIONS/PROBLEMS

1.1 Explain dimensional formula
1.2 Explain systems of measurement
1.3 Use concept of significant figures and degree of accuracy to solve problems

2. USE THE CONCEPT OF ADDITION AND RESOLUTION OF VECTORS TO PROBLEMS ON

EQUILIBRIUM INVOLVING CONCURRENT FORCES
2.1 Describe concurrent forces
2.2 Explain resolution of vectors
2.3 Use the analytical method of addition of vectors for solving problems.
2.4 Use the graphical method of addition of vectors for solving problems.
2.5 Solve problems on forces with emphasis on roof trusses, cranes simple frames and framed
structures.

3. USE THE PRINCIPLE OF MOMENTS AND CONCEPT OF COUPLE TO SOLVE PROBLEMS.

3.1 Describe the principle of moments.
3.2 Use the principle of moments to solve problems on compound levers, safety valve, steel-
yard.
3.3 Describe couple and torque.
3.4 Use the concept to solve problems on torque.

4. USE THE LAWS OF TOTAL EQUILIBRIUM OF FORCES TO SOLVE PROBLEMS INVOLVING

FORCES IN EQUILIBRIUM.
4.1 Distinguish between concurrent and non-concurrent forces.
4.2 Prepare a free body diagram of an object or a structure.
4.3 Explain Varignon's theorem.
4.4 Explain the second condition of equilibrium.
4.5 Use laws of total equilibrium to solve problems on forces involving framed structure and
ladders.

5. USE CONCEPTS OF MOMENT OF INERTIA TO PRACTICAL SITUATIONS AND PROBLEMS.

5.1 Explain moment of inertia.
5.2 Explain the theorems of Parallel and perpendicular Axis.
5.3 Describe the M.I. of regular bodies
5.4 Explain M.I. of Flywheel
5.5 Explain Energy stored by FlyWheel
5.6 Use these concepts to solve simple problems.

6. UNDERSTAND THE CONCEPTS AND LAWS OF SOLID AND FLUID FRICTION.

6.1 Define Coefficient of friction between a body placed on an inclined plane and the surface.
6.2 Explain motion of a body placed on an inclined plane
6.3 Calculate the force needed to move a body up and down an inclined plane.
6.4 Explain rolling friction and use of ball bearings.
6.5 Describe fluid friction and Stoke's law.

7. UNDERSTAND WORK, ENERGY AND POWER.

7.1 Derive work-energy relationship
7.2 Use formulae for work done by a variable force to solve problems.
7.3 Explain Power, I.H.P, B.H.P and efficiency.
7.4 Describe dynamometers.
7.5 Use the concepts to solve problems on power and work-energy

10
8. UNDERSTAND TRANSMISSION OF POWER THROUGH ROPES AND BELTS.
8.1 Describe the need for transmission of power.
8.2 Describe methods of transmission of power.
8.3 Describe transmission of power through ropes and belts.
8.4 Write formula for power transmitted through ropes and belts.
8.5 Describe transmission of power through friction gears and write formula.
8.6 Describe transmission of power through chains and toothed wheels/gears.
8.7 Use the formulae to solve/problems on transmission of power.
8.8 Describe types and function of clutches with applications

9. USE THE CONCEPTS OF MACHINES TO PRACTICAL SITUATIONS.

9.1 Explain theoretical, actual mechanical advantage and efficiency of simple machines.
9.2 Use the concept to calculate efficiency of an inclined plane.
9.3 Describe reversibility of machines.
9.4 Calculate the efficiency of:
i. Single purchase crab.
ii. Double purchase crab.
iii. Worm and worm wheel.
iv. Differential screw jack, Diff. Pulley, Wheel and Axle.
9.5 Use the formulae to solve the problems involving efficiency, M.A of the above machines.

10. USE THE CONCEPTS OF VIBRATORY MOTION TO PRACTICAL SITUATIONS.

10.1 Define vibratory motion giving examples.
10.2 Describe circular motion and its projection on diameter of the circular path.
10.3 Relate rotatory motion to simple vibratory motion.
10.4 State examples of conversion of rotatory motion to vibratory motion and vice versa.
10.5 Describe speed governors, cams quick return motion.
10.6 Derive formulae for position, velocity and acceleration of a body executing S.H.M.
10.7 Use the concept of S.H.M to helical springs.
10.8 Use the concept S.H.M to solve problems on pendulum.

11. UNDERSTAND BENDING MOMENTS AND SHEARING FORCES.

11.1 Define three types of stresses and modulii of elasticity.
11.2 Describe types of beams and loads.
11.3 Explain shearing force and bending moment.
11.4 Use these concepts to calculate S.F and B.M in a given practical situation for point loads,
uniformly distributed loads.
11.5 Prepare S.F and B.M diagram for loaded cantilever and simply supported beams.
11.6 Describe torsion and torsional stresses giving formula

12. UNDERSTAND SIMPLE MECHANISMS.

12.1 Define simple mechanisms.
12.2 Define kinematics.
12.3 Explain kinematic link or element.
12.4 Explain kinematic chains.
12.5 Distinguish between types of kinematic chains.

13. UNDERSTAND THE METHOD OF FINDING VELOCITY IN MECHANISMS.

13.1 Explains relative velocity.
13.2 Explain instantaneous center.
13.3 Explain instantaneous velocity.
13.4 Explain the method of finding velocity of a link by:
i. Relative velocity method.
ii. Instantaneous center method.

11
Phy-212 APPLIED MECHANICS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Find the weight of the given body using Law of Polygon of forces.
2. Find unknown forces in a given set of concurrent forces in equilibrium using Grave-sands apparatus
3. Set a jib crane and analyse forces in its members
4. Set a Derrick Crane and analyse forces in its members
5. Study forces shared by each member of a Toggle Joint
6. Set a Roof Truss and find forces in its members
7. Verify Principle of Moments in a compound lever
8. Calibrate a steelyard
9. Find the Reactions at the ends of a loaded beam
10. Use Reaction of Beams apparatus to study resultant of Parallel forces
11. Find the Moment of Inertia of a Flywheel
12. Find the angle of reaction for a wooden block placed on an inclined plane
13. Find the B.H.P. of a motor
14. Study the transmission of Power through friction gears
15. Study the transmission of power through belts
16. Study the transmission of Power through toothed wheels
17. Study the function of clutches
18. Find M.A. and Efficiency of worm and worm wheel
19. Find M.A. and efficiency of differential wheel and axle
20. Find the efficiency of a screw
21. Find the efficiency of a differential pulley
22. Study conversion of rotatory motion to S.H.M. using S.H.M. Model/Apparatus
23. Study conversation of rotatory motion to vibratory motion of the piston in a cylinder
24. Study the reciprocating motion
25. Study the working of cams
26. Study the quick return motion
27. Compare the Elastic constants of the given wires
28. Verify Hooke's Law using Helical Spring
29. Find the coefficient of Rigidity of a wire using Maxewell's needle
30. Find the coefficient of Rigidity of a round bar using torsion apparatus
31. Find the coefficient of Rigidity of a rectangular bar using Deflection of Beam Apparatus
32. Determine S.F. and B.M. in a loaded canti-lever (Point Loads)
33. Determine S.F. and B.M. in a simply supported Beam (Point Loads)
34. Determine S.F. and B.M. in a simply supported Beam (Point loads and uniformly distributed load)
35. Determine S.F. and B.M. in a simply supported Beam (Point loads and uniformly distributed)
36. Study working and function of link mechanism of different types

BOOKS RECOMMENDED:

1. Applied Mechanics by R.S. Khurmi

2. Applied Mechanics by A.P.S Sahihney & Prakash D. Manikpyny.
3. Applied Mechanics by Inchley and Morley
4. Theories of Machines by R.S. Khurmi and J.K. Gupta.
5. Applied Mechanics by Junarker.
6. Engineering Science Vol-I by Brown and Bryant
7. Practical Physics by Mehboob Ilahi Malik & Ikram-ul-Haq
8. Experimental Physics Note Book by M. Aslam Khan & M. Akram Sandhu
9. Experimental Mechanics (Urdu Process) by M. Akram Sandhu

12
Math-212 APPLIED MATHEMATICS-II

Total Contact Hours T P C

Theory 64 hours 2 0 2

Pre-requisite:- Must have completed Mathematics I.

AIMS After completing the course the students will be able to:

1. Solve problems of Calculus and Analytic Geometry.

2. Develop mathematical skill, attitudes and logical perception in the use of mathematical
instruments.
3. Apply principles of Differential Calculus to work out rate measures, velocity, acceleration,
maxima & minima values
4. Use Principles of Integral Calculus to compute areas and volumes.
5. Acquire proficiency in solving technological problems with mathematical clarity and insight.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. FUNCTIONS & LIMITS. 4 Hours

1.1 Constant & Variable Quantities
1.2 Functions & their classification
1.3 The concept of Limit
1.4 Limit of a Function
1.5 Fundamental Theorems on Limit
1.6 Some important Limits
1.7 Problems

2. DIFFERENTIATION 4 Hours
2.1 Increments
2.2 Differential Coefficient or Derivative
2.3 Differentiation ab-initio or by first Principle
2.4 Geometrical Interpretation of Differential Coefficient
2.5 Differential Coefficient of Xn, (ax + b)n
2.6 Three important rules
2.7 Problems

3. DIFFERENTIATION OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS 4 Hours

3.1 Explicit Functions
3.2 Implicit Functions
3.3 Parametric forms
3.4 Problems

4. DIFFERENTIATION OF TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 4 Hours

4.1 Differential Coefficient of Sin x, Cos x, Tan x from first principle.
4.2 Differential Coefficient of Cosec x, Sec x, Cot x
4.3 Differentiation of inverse Trigonometric functions.
4.4 Problems.

5. DIFFERENTIATION OF LOG: & EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS 4 Hours

5.1 Differentiation of ln x
5.2 Differentiation of Log ax
5.3 Differentiation of ax
5.4 Differentiation of ex
5.5 Problems

13
6. RATE OF CHANGE OF VARIABLE. 4 Hours
6.1 Increasing and decreasing functions
6.2 Maxima and Minima values
6.3 Criteria for maximum & minimum values
6.4 Methods of finding maxima & minima
6.5 Problems

7. INTEGRATION 8 Hours
7.1 Concept
7.2 Fundamental Formulas
7.3 Important Rules
7.4 Problems

8. METHODS OF INTEGRATION 6 Hours

8.1 Integration by substitution
8.2 Integration by parts
8.3 Problems

9. DEFINITE INTEGRALS 6 Hours

9.1 Properties
9.2 Application to area
9.3 Problems

10. PLANE ANALYTIC GEOMETRY & STRAIGHT LINE 6 Hours

10.1 Coordinate System
10.2 Distance Formula
10.3 The Ratio Formulas
10.4 Inclination and slope of a line
10.5 The slope Formula
10.6 Problems

11. EQUATIONS OF THE STRAIGHT LINE 6 Hours

11.1 Some important Forms
11.2 General Form
11.3 Angle Formula
11.4 Parallelism & Perpendicularity
11.5 Problems

12. THE EQUATIONS OF THE CIRCLE 8 Hours

12.1 Standard form of Equation
12.2 Central form of Equation
12.3 General form of Equation
12.4 Radius & Coordinates of the centre
12.5 Problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Thomas Finny - Calculus and Analytic Geometry

2. Ghulam Yasin Minhas - Technical Mathematics Vol - II, Ilmi Kitab Khana, Lahore.
3. Prof. Riaz Ali Khan - Polytechnic Mathematic Series Vol I & II, Majeed Sons, Faisalabad
4. Prof. Sana Ullah Bhatti - Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Punjab Text Book Board, Lahore.

14
Math-212 APPLIED MATHEMATICS-II

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. USE THE CONCEPT OF FUNCTIONS AND THEIR LIMITS IN SOLVING SIMPLE PROBLEMS.
1.1 Define a function.
1.2 List all types of functions.
1.3 Explain the concept of limit and limit of a function.
1.4 Explain fundamental theorems on limits.
1.5 Derive some important limits.
1.6 Solve simple problems on limits.

2. UNDERSTAND THE CONCEPT OF DIFFERENTIAL COEFFICIENT.

2.1 Derive mathematical expression for a differential coefficient
2.2 Explain geometrical interpretation of differential coefficient.
2.3 Differentiate a constant, a constant associated with a variable and the sum of finite number
of functions.
2.4 Solve related problems.

3. USE RULES OF DIFFERENTIATION TO SOLVE PROBLEMS OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS.

3.1 Differentiate ab-initio xn and (ax+b)n.
3.2 Derive product, quotient and chain rules.
3.3 Find derivatives of implicit functions & explicit functions
3.4 Differentiate parametric forms, functions w.r.t another function and by rationalization.
3.5 Solve problems using these formulas.

4. USE RULES OF DIFFERENTIATION TO SOLVE PROBLEMS INVOLVING TRIGONOMETRIC

FUNCTIONS.
4.1 Differentiate from first principle sin x, Cos x, tan x.
4.2 Derive formulas for derivation of Sec x, Cosec x, Cot x.
4.3 Find differential coefficients of inverse trigonometric functions.

5. USE RULES OF DIFFERENTIATION TO LOGARITHMIC AND EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS.

5.1 Derive formulas for differential coefficient of logarithmic and exponential functions.
5.2 Solve problems using these formulas.

6. UNDERSTAND RATE OF CHANGE OF ONE VARIABLE WITH RESPECT TO ANOTHER.

6.1 Write expression for velocity, acceleration and slope of a line.
6.2 Define an increasing and a decreasing function, maxima and minima values, point of
inflexion.
6.3 Explain criteria for maxima and minima values of a function.
6.4 Solve problems involving rate of change of variables.

7. APPLY CONCEPT OF INTEGRATION IN SOLVING TECHNOLOGICAL PROBLEMS.

7.1 Explain the concept of integration.
7.2 Write basic theorems of integration.
7.3 List some important rules of integration.
7.4 Derive fundamental formulas of integration.
7.5 Solve problems based on these formulas/rules.

8. UNDERSTAND DIFFERENT METHODS OF INTEGRATION.

8.1 List standard formulas.
8.2 Integrate a function by substitution method.
8.3 Find integrals by the method of integration by parts.
8.4 Solve problems using these methods.

15
9. UNDERSTAND THE METHODS OF SOLVING DEFINITE INTEGRALS.
9.1 Define definite integral.
9.2 List properties of definite integrals using definite integrals.
9.3 Find areas under the curves.
9.4 Solve problems of definite integrals.

10. UNDERSTAND THE CONCEPT OF PLANE ANALYTIC GEOMETRY.

10.1 Explain the rectangular coordinate system.
10.2 Locate points in different quadrants.
10.3 Derive distance formula.
10.4 Prove section formulas.
10.5 Derive Slope formula.
10.6 Solve problem using the above formulas.

11. USE EQUATIONS OF STRAIGHT LINE IN SOLVING PROBLEMS.

11.1 Define a straight line.
11.2 State general form of equation of a straight line.
11.3 Derive slope intercept and intercept forms of equations of a straight line.
11.4 Derive expression for angle between two straight lines.
11.5 Derive conditions of perpendicularity and parallelism of two straight lines.
11.6 Solve problems involving these equations/formulas.

12. SOLVE TECHNOLOGICAL PROBLEMS USING EQUATION OF CIRCLE.

12.1 Define a circle.
12.2 Describe standard, central and general forms of the equation of a circle.
12.3 Convert general form to the central form of equation of a circle.
12.4 Deduce formulas for the radius and the coordinates of the center of a circle from the general
form.
12.5 Derive equation of the circle passing through three given points.
12.6 Solve problems involving these equations.

16
Mgm-211 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
T P C
Total contact hours 1 0 1
Theory 32 Hours.

Prerequisites: The students shall already be familiar with the language concerned.

AIMS The course has been designed to enable the students to.
1. Develop communication skills.
2. Understand basic principles of good and effective business writing in commercial
and industrial fields.
3. Develop knowledge and skill to write technical report with confidence and accuracy.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. COMMUNICATION PROCESS. 6 Hours

1.1 Purposes of communication
1.2 Communication process
1.3 Distortions in communication
1.4 Consolidation of communique
1.5 Communication flow
1.6 Communication for self development

2. ORAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS. 6 Hours

2.1 Significance of speaking.
2.2 Verbal and non-verbal messages.
2.3 Strategic steps of speaking.
2.4 Characteristics of effective oral messages.
2.5 Communication Trafficking.
2.6 Oral presentation.

3. QUESTIONING SKILLS. 3 Hours

3.1 Nature of question.
3.2 Types of questions.
3.3 Characteristics of a good question.
3.4 Questioning strategy

4. LISTENING SKILLS. 5 Hours

4.1 Principles of active listening.
4.2 Skills of active listening.
4.3 Barriers to listening.
4.4 Reasons of poor listening.
4.5 Giving Feedback.

5. INTERVIEWING SKILLS. 3 Hours

5.1 Significance of interviews.
5.2 Characteristics of interviews.
5.3 Activities in an interviewing situation
5.4 Types of interviews.
5.5 Interviewing strategy.

6. REPORT WRITING. 3 Hours

6.1 Goals of report writing
6.2 Report format.
6.3 Types of reports.
6.4 Report writing strategy.

17
7. READING COMPREHENSION. 2 Hours
7.1 Reading problems.
7.2 Four Reading skills.

8. GROUP COMMUNICATION. 4 Hours

8.1 Purposes of conducting meetings.
8.2 Planning a meeting.
8.3 Types of meetings.
8.4 Selection of a group for meeting.
8.5 Group leadership skills.
8.6 Running a successful meeting.
8.7 Active participation techniques.

RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Sh. Ata-ur-Rehman Effective Business Communication & Report Writing.
2. Ulman J.N. Could JR. Technical Reporting.

18
Mgm-211 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION.

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. UNDERSTAND THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS.

1.1 State the benefits of two way communication.
1.2 Describe a model of communication process.
1.3 Explain the major communication methods used in organization.
1.4 Identify the barriers to communication and methods of overcoming these barriers.
1.5 Identify misconceptions about communication.

2. UNDERSTAND THE PROCESS OF ORAL.

2.1 Identify speaking situations with other peoples.
2.2 Identify the strategy steps of speaking.
2.3 Identify the characteristics of effective speaking.
2.4 State the principles of one-way communication.
2.5 State the principles of two-way communication.
2.6 Identify the elements of oral presentation skills.
2.7 Determine the impact of non-verbal communication on oral communication.

3. DETERMINE THE USES OF QUESTIONING SKILLS TO GATHER AND CLARIFY

INFORMATION IN THE ORAL COMMUNICATION PROCESS.
3.1 Identify different types of questions.
3.2 Determine the purpose of each type of question and its application.
3.3 Identify the hazards to be avoided when asking questions.
3.4 Demonstrate questioning skills.

4. DEMONSTRATE THE USE OF ACTIVE LISTENING SKILL IN THE ORAL COMMUNICATION

PROCESS.
4.1 State the principles of active listening.
4.2 Identify skills of active listening.
4.3 Identify barriers to active listening.
4.4 State the benefits of active listening.
4.5 Demonstrate listening skills.
4.6 Explain the importance of giving and receiving feed back.

5. Determine the appropriate interview type for the specific work-related situation and conduct a
work-related interview.
5.1 State the significance of interviews.
5.2 State the characteristics of interviews.
5.3 Explain the activities in an interviewing situation.
5.4 Describe the types of interviews.
5.5 Explain the interviewing strategy.
5.6 Prepare instrument for a structured interview.

6. PREPARE A REPORT OUT-LINE, BASED ON SUBJECT MATTER AND AUDIENCE.

6.1 Identify the different types of reports.
6.2 Determine when to use an informal or formal report presentation.
6.3 Identify the stages of planning a report.
6.4 Identify the parts of a report and choose the parts appropriate for each type of report.
6.5 Draft a report outline.

7. DEMONSTRATE READING COMPREHENSION.

7.1 Identify major reading problems.
7.2 Identify basic reading skills.
7.3 State methods of previewing written material.

19
 7.4 Identify methods of concentration when reading.
7.5 Demonstrate reading comprehension.

8. UNDERSTAND THE PRINCIPLES OF GROUP COMMUNICATIONS.

8.1 State the purpose and characteristics of major types of meeting.
8.2 Explain responsibilities of a meeting/committee.
8.3 Identify problems likely to be faced at meeting and means to overcome these problems.
8.4 Distinguish between content and process at meetings.
8.5 Explain the key characteristics of a good group facilitator.

20
Mgm-221 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS

Total Contact Hours T P C

Theory 32 1 0 1
Practical 0

AIMS The students will be able to develop management skills, get acquainted the learner with the
principles of management and economic relations and develop commercial/economic approach to
solve the problems in the industrial set-up.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. ECONOMICS 2 Hours
1.1 Definition: Adam Smith, Alfred Marshall, Prof. Robins.
1.2 Nature and scope
1.3 Importance for technicians.

2. BASIC CONCEPTS OF ECONOMICS 1 Hour

2.1 Utility
2.2 Income
2.3 Wealth
2.4 Saving
2.5 Investment
2.6 Value.

3. DEMAND AND SUPPLY. 2 Hours

3.1 Definition of demand.
3.2 Law of demand.
3.3 Definition of supply.
3.4 Law of supply.

4. FACTORS OF PRODUCTION. 2 Hours

4.1 Land
4.2 Labour
4.3 Capital
4.4 Organization.

5. BUSINESS ORGANIZATION. 3 Hours

5.1 Sole proprietorship.
5.2 Partnership
5.3 Joint stock company.

6. ENTERPRENEURIAL SKILLS 4 Hours

6.1 Preparing, planning, establishing, managing, operating and evaluating
relevant resources in small business.
6.2 Business opportunities, goal setting.
6.3 Organizing, evaluating and analyzing opportunity and risk tasks.

7. SCALE OF PRODUCTION. 2 Hours

7.1 Meaning and its determination.
7.2 Large scale production.
7.3 Small scale production.
8. ECONOMIC SYSTEM 3 Hours
8.1 Free economic system.
8.2 Centrally planned economy.
8.3 Mixed economic system.

21
9. MONEY. 1 Hour
9.1 Barter system and its inconveniences.
9.2 Definition of money and its functions.

10. BANK. 1 Hour

10.1 Definition
10.2 Functions of a commercial bank.
10.3 Central bank and its functions.

11. CHEQUE 1 Hour

11.1 Definition
11.2 Characteristics and kinds of cheque.
11.3 Dishonour of cheque.

12. FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 2 Hours

12.1 IMF
12.2 IDBP
12.3 PIDC

13. TRADE UNION 2 Hours

13.1 Introduction and brief history.
13.2 Objectives, merits and demerits.
13.3 Problems of industrial labour.

14. INTERNATIONAL TRADE. 2 Hours

14.1 Introduction
14.2 Advantages and disadvantages.

15. MANAGEMENT 1 Hour

15.1 Meaning
15.2 Functions

16. ADVERTISEMENT 2 Hours

16.1 The concept, benefits and draw-backs.
16.2 Principal media used in business world.

17. ECONOMY OF PAKISTAN 1 Hour

17.1 Introduction
17.2 Economic problems and remedies.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED
1. Nisar-ud-Din, Business Organization, Aziz Publisher, Lahore
2. M. Saeed Nasir,Introduction to Business, Ilmi Kitab Khana, Lahore.
3. S.M. Akhtar, An Introduction to Modern Economics, United Limited, Lahore.

22
Mgm-221 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS.

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. UNDERSTAND THE IMPORTANCE OF ECONOMICS.

1.1 State definition of economics given by Adam Smith, Alfred Marshall and Professor Robins.
1.2 Explain nature and scope of economics.
1.3 Describe importance of study of economics for technicians.

2. UNDERSTAND BASIC TERMS USED IN ECONOMICS.

2.1 Define basic terms, utility, income, wealth, saving, investment and value.
2.2 Explain the basic terms with examples

3. UNDERSTAND LAW OF DEMAND AND LAW OF SUPPLY.

3.1 Define Demand.
3.2 Explain law of demand with the help of schedule and diagram.
3.3 State assumptions and limitation of law of demand.
3.4 Define Supply.
3.5 Explain law of Supply with the help of schedule and diagram.
3.6 State assumptions and limitation of law of supply.

4. UNDERSTAND THE FACTORS OF PRODUCTION

4.1 Define the four factors of production.
4.2 Explain labour and its features.
4.3 Describe capital and its peculiarities.

5. UNDERSTAND FORMS OF BUSINESS ORGANIZATION.

5.1 Describe sole proprietorship, its merits and demerits.
5.2 Explain partnership, its advantages and disadvantages.
5.3 Describe joint stock company, its merits and demerits.
5.4 Distinguish public limited company and private limited company.

6. UNDERSTAND ENTERPRENEURIAL SKILLS

6.1 Explain preparing, planning, establishing and managing small business set up
6.2 Explain evaluating all relevant resources
6.3 Describe organizing analyzing and innovation of risk of task

7. UNDERSTAND SCALE OF PRODUCTION.

7.1 Explain scale of production and its determination.
7.2 Describe large scale production and it merits.
7.3 Explain small scale of production and its advantages and disadvantages.

8. UNDERSTAND DIFFERENT ECONOMIC SYSTEMS.

8.1 Describe free economic system and its characteristics.
8.2 Explain centrally planned economic system, its merits and demerits.
8.3 State mixed economic system and its features.

9. UNDERSTAND WHAT IS MONEY

9.1 Define money
9.2 Explain barter system and its inconveniences.
9.3 Explain functions of money.
10. UNDERSTAND BANK AND ITS FUNCTIONS.
10.1 Define bank.
10.2 Describe commercial bank and its functions.
10.3 State central bank and its functions.

23
11. UNDERSTAND CHEQUE AND DISHONOR OF CHEQUE.
11.1 Define cheque.
11.2 Enlist the characteristics of cheque.
11.3 Identify the kinds of cheque.
11.4 Describe the causes of dishonor of a cheque.

12. UNDERSTAND FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS.

12.1 Explain IMF and its objectives.
12.2 Explain organisational set up and objectives of IDBP.
12.3 Explain organisational set up and objectives of PIDC.

13. UNDERSTAND TRADE UNION, ITS BACKGROUND AND FUNCTIONS.

13.1 Describe brief history of trade union.
13.2 State functions of trade union.
13.3 Explain objectives, merits and demerits of trade unions.
13.4 Enlist problems of industrial labour.

14. UNDERSTAND INTERNATIONAL TRADE.

14.1 Explain international trade.
14.2 Enlist its merits and demerits.

15. UNDERSTAND MANAGEMENT

15.1 Explain meaning of management.
15.2 Describe functions of management.
15.3 Identify the problems of business management.

16. UNDERSTAND ADVERTISEMENT.

16.1 Explain the concept of advertisement.
16.2 Enlist benefits and drawbacks of advertisement.
16.3 Describe principal media of advertisement used in business world.

17. UNDERSTAND THE ECONOMIC PROBLEMS OF PAKISTAN.

17.1 Describe economy of Pakistan.
17.2 Explain economic problems of Pakistan
17.3 Explain remedial measures for economic problems of Pakistan.

24
EL.T-222 MOTORS & GENERATORS
T P C
Total contact hours: 1 3 2
Theory: 32 hours
Practical: 96 Hours

Pre-requisite: Electrical essentials and networks.

AIMS. After studying the subject the student will be able to understand the construction,
working, application of DC and AC machines.

1. Define laws of electromagnetic induction.

2. Explain the function of dc generator.
3. Describe the principle of dc motor.
4. Identify the types of dc generators and dc motors.
5. List of applications of dc motors in the electronics field.
6. Describe the working of alternator.
7. Explain the function of three phase ac motor.
8. List of type of single phase ac motor.
9. Identify the working principle of various type of single phase ac motor.
10. Explain the function of synchronous and special ac motors.

1. ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION. 1 Hour

1.1. Review of Faraday's Law and Lenz's Law
1.2 Principle of simple loop generator.

2. DC GENERATORS. 3 Hours
2.1 Construction
2.2. Field and armature winding ad commutator.
2.3 EMF Equation, Simple calculations.
2.4 Types and brief description of dc generator, method of excitation and their
characteristics.

3. DC MOTORS. 7 Hours
3.1 Principle and construction of dc motor.
3.2 Back emf, cause and effect.
3.3 Equation of motor and simple problems.
3.4 Types of dc motors, fractional h.p. & miniature dc motor
3.5 Applications of each type of dc motor.
3.6 Methods and need of motor starters.
3.7 Methods of speed control of dc motors (electrical and electronic methods).
3.8 Line diagram of motor starter and controller with brief description.

4. ALTERNATORS. 4 Hours
4.1 Construction of Alternator, importance of stationary armature. Comparison with
generator.
4.2 Methods of field excitation.
4.3 Brief introduction to 3-phase ac generation

25
5. THREE PHASE AC MOTORS. 8 Hours
5.1 Introduction to three phase rotating magnetic field.
5.2 PrincipIe and induction motors.
5.3 Types of 3-phase induction motors.
5.4 Methods of starting and speed control of three phase induction motors.
5.5 Line diagram of induction motor starters and connection
5.6 Applications of three phase induction motors.

6. SINGLE PHASE AC MOTORS. 6 Hours

6.1 Classification of single phase ac motors.
6.2 Single phase induction motor.
6.3 Double field revolving concept.
6.4 Split phase and capacitor start induction- run motors.
6.5. Capacitor start and run motor, shaded pole motors.
6.6 Repulsion motor.
6.7 AC series motor.
6.8 Synchronous motor.

7. UNEXCITED SINGLE PHASE SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR. 1 Hour

7.1 Reluctance motor.
7.2 Hysteresis motor.

8. SPECIAL MOTOR. 2 Hours

8.1 Stepper motor.
8.2 Servo motor

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:
I. B.L. Theraja, “Electrical Technology"
2. Admiralty, "Examples in electrical calculation"
3. Humpherics "Motors and Controls"

26
EL.T. 222: MOTOR & GENERATOR

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES.

1. UNDERSTAND FARADAY'S LAWS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND

LENZS LAW.
1.1 Describe Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction and Lenz's law.
1.2 Explain the principle of simple loop generator.

2. DC GENERATORS.
2.1 Understand the construction and working of DC generator.
2.1.1 Draw the construction of DC generators
2.2 Explain the working of field and armature winding
2.3 Draw the construction of commutator
2.4 Explain the operation of commutator
2.5 Drive the E.M.F. Equation for DC generator
2.6 Solve problems based on EMF equitation
2.7 Enlist the types of DC generator
2.8 Explain the method of field excitation, and characteristics of each.

3. UNDERSTAND THE WORKING OF D.C. MOTORS.

3.1 Draw the construction of DC motor
3.2 Explain the working principle of d.c. motor
3.3 Explain back E.M.F (cause and effect of back EMF)
3.4 Write and explain the equation of d.c. motor.
3.5 Solve simple problems based on the equation of d.c. motor
3.6 Enlist the types of d.c. motors
3.7 Enlist the applications of each type of d.c motor
3.8 Describe the starting methods for d.c. motors
3.9 Explain the methods of speed control of d.c. motor (Electrical & Electronics)
3.10 Draw line diagram of d.c. motor starter and speed controller.
3.11 Explain the line diagram of DC motor starter & speed controller.

4. UNDERSTAND THE WORKING PRINCIPLE OF AN ALTERNATOR

4.1 Introduction to an alternator.
4.2 Sketch the constructional view of an alternator.
4.3 Compare an alternator with dc generator
4.4 Explain three phase AC generation.

5. UNDERSTAND THE WORKING PRINCIPLE, TYPES AND USES OF THREE PHASE

AC MOTORS.
5.1 Describe 3-phase rotating magnetic field
5.2 Explain the principle of induction motor
5.3 Enlist the types of 3-phase induction motors
5.4 Explain the methods of starting three phase induction motors.
5.5 Explain the speed control of induction motors.
5.6 Draw the line diagram of induction motor connected to a motor starter.
5.7 Explain the line diagram of induction motor connected to a starter.
5.8 List the uses of three phase induction motors.

27
6. UNDERSTAND THE WORKING PRINCIPLES, CONSTRUCTION, TYPES AND USES
OF SINGLE PHASE MOTORS.
6.1 Classify single phase AC motor.
6.2 Draw the constructional view of single phase induction motor.
6.3 Explain the working of single phase induction motor.
6.4 Enlist the uses of single phase induction motor
6.5 Describe the uses of single phase induction motor.
6.6 Explain double field revolving concept (split phase rotating field).
6.7 Draw the construction of capacitor start run motor.
6.8 Explain the working of capacitor start run motor
6.9 Enlist the uses of capacitor start run motor.
6.10 Draw the construction of shaded pole motor.
6.11 Explain the working of shaded pole motor.
6.12 Enlist the uses of shaded pole motor.
6.13 Draw the construction of repulsion motor.
6.14 Explain the working of repulsion motor.
6.15 Enlist the uses of repulsion motors.
6.16 Draw the construction of AC series motor.
6.17 Explain the working of AC series motor.
6.18 List the uses of AC series motors.
6.19 Explain the construction and principle of Synchronous motor.
6.20 List its uses.

7. UNDERSTAND THE CONSTRUCTION & WORKING OF UNEXCITED SINGLE PHASE

SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR.
7.1 Draw the construction of reluctance motor.
7.2 Explain the working of reluctance motor.
7.3 List the uses of reluctance motor.
7.4 Draw the construction of Hystersis motor.
7.5 Explain the operation of Hystersis motor..

8. UNDERSTAND THE TYPES, CONSTRUCTION , WORKING AND USES OF STEPPER

AND SERVO MOTOR.
8.1 Draw the construction of stepper motor.
8.2 Explain the working operation of stepper motor.
8.3 List the uses of stepper motor.
8.4 Draw the construction of servo motor.
8.5 Explain the working of servo motor.
8.6 List the uses of servo motor.

28
EI.T. 222 MOTORS & GENERATORS

LIST OF PRACTICALS:
1. Verify the Faraday’s Laws of electromagnetic induction by using a simple loop generator.
2. Study of main part of a d.c. generator.
3. Plot the O.C.C. of a d.c. shunt generator.
4. Plot the load characteristics of d.c. shunt generators.
5. Study the effect of back e.m.f. of a d.c. motor.
6. Plotting of load characteristics of d.c. series motor.
7. Starting a d.c. series and shunt motors through starters.
8. Practice speed control of d.c. series and shunt motors.
9. Study the operation of an alternator (effect of variation field excitation and rotor speed).
10. Study of rotating magnetic field.
11. Study the operation of 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor.
12. Study the operation of 3-phases synchronous motor.
13. Practice reversal of direction of rotation on 3-phase induction motor.
14. Study the line diagram of direct on 3-phase motor starter.
15. Connect a 3-phase induction motor to supply line through a direct-on starter.
16. Study the line and connection diagram of a starter-delta starter.
17. Connect a 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor to supply line through a star-delta starter.
18. Study operation of split-phase single phase a-c motor.
19. Study the operation of capacitor-start -and-run single phase a-c motor.
20. Study the operation of shaded pole single phase motor.
21. Study the operation of a-c series motor.
22. Study the speed control of a-c series motor.
23. Study the working of miniature (reluctance and hystersis) single phase a-c motor.

29
AT-215 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

Total contact hours: T P C

Theory: 96 Hours 3 6 5
Practical: 192 Hours

Pre-requisite: Successful completion of EL.T 253.

AIMS. After studying the subject the student will be able to:

1. Interpret positional numbering systems.

2. Measure basic digital circuits and analyze complex digital circuits.
3. Identify digital family characteristics.
4. Identify the different TTL families and their respective characteristics..
5. Use Karnaugh’s maps to reduce a logic equation to its simplest expression.
6. Build and use clock and trigger circuits.
7. Measure flip-flop, latch circuits, shift register circuits, counter circuits arithmetic circuits,
and data conversion and transmission circuits.
8. Perform digital-to-analog and analog-to-digital conversions.
9. Provide visual indicators and displays to digital circuits.
10. Describe the operation of basic memory devices.
11. Interface I/O’s to a digital circuits.
12. Describe some of the newest digital technology.

1. POSITIONAL NOTATION. 4 Hours

1.1 Definition of the following terms:
1.1.1 Binary.
1.1.2 Octal.
1.1.3 Decimal
1.1.4 Hexadecimal
1.1.5 Base
1.2 Characters used as digits by each numbering system.
1.3 Count in each numbering system.
1.4 Conversion of numbers from one base to another:
1.4.1 Binary <--> Decimal
1.4.2 Binary <--> Octal
1.4.3 Binary <--> Hexadecimal
1.4.4 Octal <--> Decimal
1.4.5 Octal <--> Hexadecimal
1.4.6 Hexadecimal <--> Decimal

2. INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL ICs. 2 Hours

2.1 Definition of the following terms:
2.1.1 DIP
2.1.2 SIP, ZIP
2.1.3 QUIP
2.1.4 Leadless chip carrier (JEDEC type A)
2.1.5 Pin grid array
2.1.6 Plastic leaded chip carrier
2.1.7 SMD
2.2 Location of pin 1 or index for a given IC.

30
 2.3 Different techniques used for mounting each type of IC.
2.4 Advantages and disadvantages of sockets for each type of IC.

3. BASIC LOGIC GATES. 4 Hours

3.1 Definition of the following terms:
3.1.1 Boolean expression
3.1.2 Boolean equation
3.1.3 Truth table
3.1.4 High / true / 1
3.1.5 Low / false / 0
3.2 MIL-STD and IEEE symbols for the following digital gates:
3.2.1 AND
3.2.2 OR
3.2.3 XOR
3.2.4 NOT (inverter)
3.2.5 NAND
3.2.6 XNOR
3.2.7 BUFFER
3.3 Function of each basic gate.
3.4 Boolean expression for each basic gate.
3.5 Truth table for each basic gate.

4. BOOLEAN ALGEBRA. 4 Hours

6.1 Circuits, Boolean equation and truth table for each table.
6.2 Boolean laws.
6.3 Morgan’s Theorems.
6.4 NOR gates to implement basic gates.
6.5 NAND gates to implement basic gates.

5. KARNAUGH’S MAPPING. 4 Hour

5.1. Sum of products from an equation and from a truth table for each circuit.
5.2. Karnaugh’s map from a sum products.
5.3. Reduction of the sum of products to its simplest form.
5.4. Product of sums from an equation and from a truth table for a circuit.

6. ARITHMETIC CIRCUITS. 4 Hours

6.1. Arithmetic functions:
6.1.1. Binary addition
6.1.2. Binary subtraction by 1’s complement
6.1.3. Binary subtraction by 2’s complement
6.1.4. Binary multiplication
6.1.5. Binary division
6.2. Operation in binary:
6.2.1. Negation
6.2.2. Fractional representation
6.2.3. Floating-point representation
6.3. Operation of the following circuits:
6.3.1. Half-adder
6.3.2. Full-adder
6.3.3. Half-adder / subtracter
6.3.4. Full-adder / subtracter
6.3.5. Serial-adder / subtracter

31
 6.3.6. Parallel-adder / subtracter
6.3.7. Look-ahead-carry adder
6.3.8. Magnitude comparator
6.4. Arithmetic circuit data sheets.

7. DATA CONVERSION / TRANSMISSION. 6 Hours

7.1. Definition of the following terms
7.1.1. Code
7.1.2. Gray code
7.1.3. XS-3 code
7.1.4. BCD
7.1.5. ASCII
7.1.6. EBCDIC
7.1.7. Even parity
7.1.8. Odd parity
7.2. Conversions for simple numbers:
7.2.1. Gray code < -- > decimal
7.2.2. XS-3 code < -- > decimal
7.2.3. BCD < -- > decimal
7.3. Operation of the following circuits:
7.3.1. Encoder
7.3.2. Priority encoder
7.3.3. Decoder
7.3.4. Multiplexer
7.3.5. Demultiplexer
7.3.6. Parity generator
7.3.7. Parity checker
7.4. Features of data conversion / transmission circuits:
7.4.1. Gate decoding
7.4.2. Cascading
7.4.3. Parity transmission
7.5. Data conversion and data transmission circuit data sheets.

8. IC FAMILIES. 6 Hours
8.1. Identification of the following digital families::
8.1.1. Diode gate
8.1.2. RTL
8.1.3. DTL
8.1.4. TTL
8.1.5. ITL
8.1.6. MOSL (CMOS, HMOS, HCMOS, n-MOS, p-MOS, silicon-gate CMOS)
8.1.7. ECL
8.1.8. SOS
8.1.9. GaAs, GaAIAs
8.2. Comparison of the following characteristics for TTL, ECL, CMOS, and GaAs:
8.2.1. Density
8.2.2. Speed
8.2.3. Supply voltage(s)
8.2.4. Voltage swing
8.3. Equivalent circuits for the following logic families:
8.3.1. TTL
8.3.2. CMOS
8.3.3. ECL
8.4. Explain the operation of a TTL gate.

32
9. TTL FAMILY CHARACTERISTICS. 4 Hours
9.1. Definition of the following parameters:
9.1.1. Voltage margin
9.1.2. Noise margin
9.1.3. Noise immunity
9.1.4. Propagation delay
9.1.5. Source current
9.1.6. Sink current
9.1.7. Fan-in
9.1.8. Fan-out
9.1.9. Power dissipation
9.2. Different TTL techniques:
9.2.1. 74xx standard
9.2.2. 74Hxx hi-speed
9.2.3. 74Lxx lo-power
9.2.4. 74Sxx Schottky
9.2.5. 74LSxx lo-power Schottky
9.2.6. 74Asxx advanced Schottky
9.2.7. 74ALSxx lo-power advanced Schottky
9.2.8. 74Fxx fast (Fairchild)
9.2.9. 74Cxx lo-power CMOS
9.2.10. 74HCxx hi-power CMOS
9.2.11. 54yyyxx military specifications
9.3. Data sheets.
9.4. Comparison of the following parameters for the various TTL techniques:
9.4.1. Propagation delay
9.4.2. Power dissipation
9.4.3. Fan-out

10. CLOCK AND TRIGGER CIRCUITS. 8 Hours

10.1. Definition of the following terms:
10.1.1. Clock
10.1.2. Trigger
10.1.3. Pulse
10.1.4. Frequency
10.1.5. Pulse width
10.2. Operation of the followings:
10.2.1. Circuits
10.2.2. Inverter clock
10.2.3. Ring oscillator
10.2.4. Crystal controlled inverter clock
10.2.5. NAND-gate clock
10.2.6. NOR-gate clock
10.3. Pulse operation on digital circuits.
10.4. Labeling of the following points on a clock waveform:
10.4.1. Rise time
10.4.2. Fall time
10.4.3. Pulse width
10.4.4. Overshoot
10.4.5. Undershoot
10.4.6. Ringing

33
11. FLIP-FLOPS AND LATCHES. 8 Hours
11.1. Definition of the following terms:
11.1.1. Latch
11.1.2. Flip-flop
11.1.3. Racing
11.1.4. Set-up time
11.1.5. Hold time
11.1.6. Switch bounce
11.2. Clock conventions used in digital circuits.
11.3. Operation of the following circuits:
11.3.1. S-R latch
11.3.2. Gated S-R latch
11.3.3. Toggle latch
11.3.4. Gated D latch
11.3.5. Edge-triggered flip-flops (S-R, D, J-K)
11.3.6. Pulse triggered flip-flops (S-R, D, J-K)
11.3.7. Data lock-out flip-flop
11.3.8. Switch debouncer
11.3.9. One shots
11.4. Flip-flop data sheets.

12. SHIFT REGISTERS 6 Hours

12.1. Definition of the following terms:
12.1.1. Register
12.1.2. Storage capacity
12.1.3. Shift-register
12.1.4. Data rotate register
12.2. Operation of the following circuits:
12.2.1. Serial in / serial out shift register
12.2.2. Serial in / parallel out shift register
12.2.3. parallel in / parallel out shift register
12.2.4. parallel in / serial out shift register
12.2.5. Bidirectional shift register
12.2.6. Bidirectional data rotate register
12.3. Shift-register data sheets.

13. COUNTER CIRCUITS. 8 Hours

13.1. Definition of the following terms:
13.1.1. Modulus
13.1.2. Asynchronous
13.1.3. Synchronous
13.1.4. Data rotate register
13.2. Operation of the following circuits:
13.3. Ripple counter
13.3.1. Asynchronous up / down counter
13.3.2. Synchronous binary counter
13.3.3. Synchronous up / down counter
13.3.4. Ring counter
13.3.5. Johnson counter
13.4. Features of counters.
13.4.1. Loading
13.4.2. Decoding
13.4.3. Truncating
13.4.4. Recycling
13.4.5. Cascading

34
14. DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG / ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL. 8 Hours
14.1. Definition of the following terms
14.1.1. Analog-to-digital conversion
14.1.2. Digital-to-analog conversion
14.1.3. Resolution
14.1.4. Sampling rate
14.1.5. Analog switch
14.2. Operation of the following circuits:
14.2.1. Resistive ladder
14.2.2. Binary ladder
14.2.3. Counter ramp ADC
14.2.4. Double ramp ADC
14.2.5. Successive approximation ADC
14.2.6. Flash ADC
14.2.7. Sample and hold
14.2.8. Schmitt trigger
14.3. ADC and DAC circuit data sheets.

15. MEMORY CONCEPTS. 6 Hours

15.1. Definition of the following terms
15.1.1. RAM
15.1.2. ROM
15.1.3. Volatile / non-volatile
15.1.4. Programming
15.1.5. Memory location
15.1.6. Memory address
15.1.7. Memory organization
15.2. General block diagram of a simple RAM.
15.3. Function of the following RAM components:
15.3.1. Memory array
15.3.2. Address register
15.3.3. Data register
15.4. Memory operations:
15.4.1. Chip selection
15.4.2. Address selection
15.4.3. Read
15.4.4. Write
15.5. Functional characteristics of the following memory technology:
15.5.1. Bipolar
15.5.2. CMOS
15.5.3. ECL
15.5.4. CCD
15.5.5. MBM
15.5.6. FIFO
15.6. Operation of a read and write cycle for the following devices:
15.6.1. DRAM
15.6.2. SRAM
15.7. Operation of a programming cycle for the following devices:
15.7.1. ROM
15.7.2. PROM
15.7.3. EPROM
15.7.4. EEPROM
15.7.5. PLA / PAL
15.8. Memory device data sheets.

35
16. INTERFACING DIGITAL CIRCUITS 10 Hours
16.1 Definition of the following terms
16.1.1 Bus
16.1.2 Totem-pole output
16.1.3 Open-collector output
16.1.4 Open-emitter output
16.1.5 Wired AND
16.1.6 Wired OR
16.1.7 Tri-state logic
16.2 Block diagram of an interface using:
16.2.1 A unidirectional bus
16.2.2 A bidirectional bus
16.3 Operation of the following circuits:
16.3.1 Wired AND
16.3.2 Wired OR
16.3.3 Tri-state bus interface
16.3.4 Driver
16.3.5 Receiver
16.3.6 Schmitt trigger
16.4 Pull-up and pull-down resistors.
16.5 How to interface:
16.5.1 TTL to CMOS
16.5.2 TTL to ANALOG
16.5.3 TTL to a bus
16.6 Design considerations:
16.6.1 Power source selection
16.6.2 Noise immunity
16.6.3 Output loading
16.6.4 TTL technology selection
16.6.5 Termination of unused inputs
16.7 Interface device data sheets.

17. NEWEST TECHNOLOGY 4 Hours

17.1 Description of the following technology:
17.1.1 SMD
17.1.2 Hybrid IC’s
17.1.3 DSP
17.1.4 VLSI
17.1.5 Optical IC’s
17.1.6 Superconduction
17.1.7 Josephson’s junction
17.1.8 Any other advanced technology approved by the Instructor
17.2 How the above technologies are an improvement over current technologies.
17.3 Research a given technology and prepare a 5 to 10 minute seminar to describe such
technology to classmates.
17.4 Prepare a written report on the subject researched.

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Introduction to Number Systems, Sperry Corporation.
2. Digital Fundamentals 6th edition, Floyed.
3. LS/S/TTL Logic Databook, National Semiconductor Corporation.
4. Schottky TTL Databook, Motora Inc.
5. Webb “ Digital Fundamentals “.

36
AT-215 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES.

1 POSITIONAL NOTATION.
1.1. Define the following terms:
1.1.1. Binary.
1.1.2. Octal.
1.1.3. Decimal
1.1.4. Hexadecimal
1.1.5. Base
1.2. List the characters used as digits by each numbering system.
1.3. Count in each numbering system.
1.4. Convert numbers from one base to another:
1.4.1. Binary <--> Decimal
1.4.2. Binary <--> Octal
1.4.3. Binary <--> Hexadecimal
1.4.4. Octal <--> Decimal
1.4.5. Octal <--> Hexadecimal
1.4.6. Hexadecimal <--> Decimal

2 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL ICs.

2.1 Definition of the following terms:
2.1.1 DIP
2.1.2 SIP, ZIP
2.1.3 QUIP
2.1.4 Leadless chip carrier (JEDEC type A)
2.1.5 Pin grid array
2.1.6 Plastic leaded chip carrier
2.1.7 SMD
2.2 Locate pin 1 or index for a given IC.
2.3 Describe the different techniques used for mounting each type of IC.
2.4 List the advantages and disadvantages of sockets for each type of IC.

3 BASIC LOGIC GATES.

3.1 Define the following terms:
3.1.1 Boolean expression
3.1.2 Boolean equation
3.1.3 Truth table
3.1.4 High / true / 1
3.1.5 Low / false / 0
3.2 Draw the MIL-STD and IEEE symbols for the following digital gates:
3.2.1 AND
3.2.2 OR
3.2.3 XOR
3.2.4 NOT (inverter)
3.2.5 NAND
3.2.6 XNOR
3.2.7 BUFFER

37
 3.3 Describe the function of each basic gate.
3.4 Write the Boolean expression for each basic gate.
3.5 Draw the truth table for each basic gate.

4 BOOLEAN ALGEBRA.
4.1 Analyze circuits and write the Boolean equation and truth table for each table.
4.2 Apply Boolean laws to simplify each circuit.
4.3 Convert NOR circuits to NAND circuits and NAND to NOR using the Morgan’s Theorams.
4.4 Use NOR gates to implement basic gates.
4.5 Use NAND gates to implement basic gates.

5 KARNAUGH’S MAPPING.
5.1 Generate the sum of products from an equation and from a truth table for each circuit.
5.2 Draw a Karnaugh’s map from a sum products.
5.3 Using a Karanaugh’s map, reduce the sum of products to its simplest form.
5.4 Generate the product of sums from an equation and from a truth table for a circuit.

6 ARITHMETIC CIRCUITS.
6.1 Perform the following arithmetic functions:
6.1.1 Binary addition
6.1.2 Binary subtraction by 1’s complement
6.1.3 Binary subtraction by 2’s complement
6.1.4 Binary multiplication
6.1.5 Binary division
6.2 Perform the following operation in binary:
6.2.1 Negation
6.2.2 Fractional representation
6.2.3 Floating-point representation
6.3 Describe the operation of the following circuits:
6.3.1 Half-adder
6.3.2 Full-adder
6.3.3 Half-adder / subtracter
6.3.4 Full-adder / subtracter
6.3.5 Serial-adder / subtracter
6.3.6 Parallel-adder / subtracter
6.3.7 Look-ahead-carry adder
6.3.8 Magnitude comparator
6.4 Interpret arithmetic circuit data sheets as required.

7 DATA CONVERSION / TRANSMISSION.

7.1 Define the following terms
7.1.1 Code
7.1.2 Gray code
7.1.3 XS-3 code
7.1.4 BCD
7.1.5 ASCII
7.1.6 EBCDIC
7.1.7 Even parity
7.1.8 Odd parity
7.2 Perform the following conversions for simple numbers:
7.2.1 Gray code < -- > decimal
7.2.2 XS-3 code < -- > decimal
7.2.3 BCD < -- > decimal

38
 7.3 Describe the operation of the following circuits:
7.3.1 Encoder
7.3.2 Priority encoder
7.3.3 Decoder
7.3.4 Multiplexer
7.3.5 Demultiplexer
7.3.6 Parity generator
7.3.7 Parity checker
7.4 Explain how the following features of data conversion / transmission circuits are
achieved:
7.4.1 Gate decoding
7.4.2 Cascading
7.4.3 Parity transmission
7.5 Interpret data conversion and data transmission circuit data sheets as required.

8 IC FAMILIES.
8.1 Identify each of the following digital families:
8.1.1 Diode gate
8.1.2 RTL
8.1.3 DTL
8.1.4 TTL
8.1.5 ITL
8.1.6 MOSL (CMOS, HMOS, HCMOS, n-MOS, p-MOS, silicon-gate CMOS)
8.1.7 ECL
8.1.8 SOS
8.1.9 GaAs, GaAIAs
8.2 Compare the following characteristics for TTL, ECL, CMOS, and Ga As:
8.2.1 Density
8.2.2 Speed
8.2.3 Supply voltage(s)
8.2.4 Voltage swing
8.3 Draw the equivalent circuits for the following logic families:
8.3.1 TTL
8.3.2 CMOS
8.3.3 ECL
8.4 Explain the operation of a TTL gate.

9 TTL FAMILY CHARACTERISTICS.

9.1 Define the following parameters:
9.1.1 Voltage margin
9.1.2 Noise margin
9.1.3 Noise immunity
9.1.4 Propagation delay
9.1.5 Source current
9.1.6 Sink current
9.1.7 Fan-in
9.1.8 Fan-out
9.1.9 Power dissipation
9.2 Identify the different TTL techniques:
9.2.1 74xx standard
9.2.2 74Hxx hi-speed

39
 9.2.3 74Lxx lo-power
9.2.4 74Sxx Schottky
9.2.5 74LSxx lo-power Schottky
9.2.6 74Asxx advanced Schottky
9.2.7 74ALSxx lo-power advanced Schottky
9.2.8 74Fxx fast (Fairchild)
9.2.9 74Cxx lo-power CMOS
9.2.10 74HCxx hi-power CMOS
9.2.11 54YYYxx military specifications
9.3 Interpret data sheets.
9.4 Compare the following parameters for the various TTL techniques:
9.4.1 Propagation delay
9.4.2 Power dissipation
9.4.3 Fan-out

10 CLOCK AND TRIGGER CIRCUITS.

10.1 Define the following terms:
10.1.1 Clock
10.1.2 Trigger
10.1.3 Pulse
10.1.4 Frequency
10.1.5 Pulse width
10.2 Describe the operation of the following:
8.2.1 Circuits
10.2.1 Inverter clock
10.2.2 Ring oscillator
10.2.3 Crystel controlled inverter clock
10.2.4 NAND-gate clock
10.2.5 NOR-gate clock
10.3 Explain pulse operation on digital circuits.
10.4 Draw and label the following points on a clock waveform:
10.4.1 Rise time
10.4.2 Fall time
10.4.3 Pulse width
10.4.4 Overshoot
10.4.5 Undershoot
10.4.6 Ringing

11 FLIP-FLOPS AND LATCHES.

11.1 Define the following terms:
11.1.1 Latch
11.1.2 Flip-flop
11.1.3 Racing
11.1.4 Set-up time
11.1.5 Hold time
11.1.6 Switch bounce
11.2 Describe the clock conventions used in digital circuits.
11.3 Describe the operation of the following circuits:
11.3.1 S-R latch
11.3.2 Gated S-R latch
11.3.3 Toggle latch
11.3.4 Gated D latch
11.3.5 Edge-triggered flip-flops (S-R, D, J-K)
11.3.6 Pulse triggered flip-flops (S-R, D, J-K)
11.3.7 Data lock-out flip-flop

40
 11.3.8 Switch debouncer
11.3.9 One shots
11.4 Interpret flip-flop data sheets as required.

12 SHIFT REGISTERS
12.1 Define the following terms:
12.1.1 Register
12.1.2 Storage capacity
12.1.3 Shift-register
12.1.4 Data rotate register
12.2 Describe the operation of the following circuits:
12.2.1 Serial in / serial out shift register
12.2.2 Serial in / parallel out shift register
12.2.3 parallel in / parallel out shift register
12.2.4 parallel in / serial out shift register
12.2.5 Bidirectional shift register
12.2.6 Bidirectional data rotate register
12.3 Interpret shift-register data sheets as required.

13 COUNTER CIRCUITS.
13.1 Define the following terms:
13.1.1 Modulus
13.1.2 Asynchronous
13.1.3 Synchronous
13.1.4 Data rotate register
13.2 Describe the operation of the following circuits:
13.2.1 Ripple counter
13.2.2 Asynchronous up / down counter
13.2.3 Synchronous binary counter
13.2.4 Synchronous up / down counter
13.2.5 Ring counter
13.2.6 Johnson counter
13.3 Explain how the following features of counters are achieved:
13.3.1 Loading
13.3.2 Decoding
13.3.3 Truncating
13.3.4 Recycling
13.3.5 Cascading

14 DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG / ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL.
14.1 Define the following terms
14.1.1 Analog-to-digital conversion
14.1.2 Digital-to-analog conversion
14.1.3 Resolution
14.1.4 Sampling rate
14.1.5 Analog switch
14.2 Describe the operation of the following circuits:
14.2.1 Resistive ladder
14.2.2 Binary ladder
14.2.3 Counter ramp ADC
14.2.4 Double ramp ADC
14.2.5 Successive approximation ADC
14.2.6 Flash ADC
14.2.7 Sample and hold
14.2.8 Schmitt trigger
14.3 Interpret ADC and DAC circuit data sheets as required.

41
15 MEMORY CONCEPTS.
15.1 Define the following terms
15.1.1 RAM
15.1.2 ROM
15.1.3 Volatile / non-volatile
15.1.4 Programming
15.1.5 Memory location
15.1.6 Memory address
15.1.7 Memory organization
15.2 Draw and label the general block diagram of a simple RAM.
15.3 Describe the function of the following RAM components:
15.3.1 Memory array
15.3.2 Address register
15.3.3 Data register
15.4 Describe how the following memory operations are performed:
15.4.1 Chip selection
15.4.2 Address selection
15.4.3 Read
15.4.4 Write
15.5 Describe the functional characteristics of the following memory technology:
15.5.1 Bipolar
15.5.2 CMOS
15.5.3 ECL
15.5.4 CCD
15.5.5 MBM
15.5.6 FIFO
15.6 Describe the operation of a read and write cycle for the following devices:
15.6.1 DRAM
15.6.2 SRAM
15.7 Describe the operation of a programming cycle for the following devices:
15.7.1 ROM
15.7.2 PROM
15.7.3 EPROM
15.7.4 EEPROM
15.7.5 PLA / PAL
16.8 Interpret memory device data sheets as required.

16 INTERFACING DIGITAL CIRCUITS.

16.1 Define the following terms
16.1.1 Bus
16.1.2 Totem-pole output
16.1.3 Open-collector output
16.1.4 Open-emitter output
16.1.5 Wired AND
16.1.6 Wired OR
16.1.7 Tri-state logic
16.2 Draw the block diagram of an interface using:
16.2.1 A unidirectional bus
16.2.2 A bidirectional bus
16.3 Describe the operation of the following circuits:
16.3.1 Wired AND
16.3.2 Wired OR
16.3.3 Tri-state bus interface
16.3.4 Driver
16.3.5 Receiver

42
 16.3.6 Schmitt trigger
16.4 Explain why and how pull-up and pull-down resistors are used.
16.5 Describe how to interface:
16.5.1 TTL to CMOS
16.5.2 TTL to ANALOG
16.5.3 TTL to a bus
16.6 Describe how the following design considerations are addressed:
16.6.1 Power source selection
16.6.2 Noise immunity
16.6.3 Output loading
16.6.4 TTL technology selection
16.6.5 Termination of unused inputs
16.7 Interpret interface device data sheets as required..

17. NEWEST TECHNOLOGY

17.1. Describe the following technology:
17.1.1 SMD
17.1.2 Hybrid IC’s
17.1.3 DSP
17.1.4 VLSI
17.1.5 Optical IC’s
17.1.6 Super-conduction
17.1.7 Josephson’s junction
17.1.8 Any other advanced technology approved by the Instructor
17.2 Explain how the above technologies are an improvement over current technologies.
17.3 Research a given technology and prepare a 5 to 10 minute seminar to describe such
technology to classmates.
17.4 Prepare a written report on the subject researched.

43
AT-215 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

LIST OF PRACTICLES.

1. Interpret positional numbering systems.

2. Identify different IC packages.
3. Familiarization with Digital trainer.
4. Determine truth tables for basic gates.
5. Design logic gates using discrete components.
6. Determine selected parameters of TTL devices.
7. Simplify and validate simplified circuits using Boolean algebra.
8. Verify the Morgan’s theorems
9. Use de Morgan’s theorem to simplify a circuit and verify its operation.
10. Build XOR and XNOR circuits using basic gates.
11. Use Kamaugh’s maps to reduce complex gates into its simplest form.
12. Use Kamaugh’s maps to create a circuit.
13. Design and build clock circuit.
14. Use a variety of latches.
15. Build an edge-triggered flip-flop.
16. Detect the difference between edge-triggered, pulse-triggered and data lock-out flip-flops.
17. Design and build shift register circuits of any kind.
18. Design and build circuits for serial or parallel data transfers.
19. Design and build a ripple counter.
20. Design and build a synchronous counter of any modulus.
21. Design and build a register counter with any number of states.
22. Build simple arithmetic circuits.
23. Build complex arithmetic circuits.
24. Design and build data conversion circuits.
25. Use encoder and decoder circuits.
26. Use multiplexer and demultiplexer circuits.
27. Design and build a resistive ladder digital to analog converter.
28. Design and build an analog to digital converter.
29. Install seven segment displays into any circuit.
30. Store and retrieve data to and from a memory device.
31. Use Schmitt trigger.
32. Use open collector circuits.
33. Use tri-state devices.
34. Using an actual circuit, identify the individual IC’s, and perform measurements on the circuit.
35. Use IC testers and troubleshoot individual IC’s.
36. Use logic probes to troubleshoot a complex digital circuit.
37. Use an oscilloscope to troubleshoot a complex digital circuit.
38. Troubleshoot a complex digital circuit
39. Project.

44
AT- 225 MICROPROCESSOR
T P C
Total contact hours: 3 6 5
Theory: 96 Hours
Practical: 192 Hours

Pre-requisite: Successful completion of EL.T 214 and AT 201.

1. WHAT IS THE MICROPROCESSOR? 2 hrs

1.1. What is a microprocessor?
1.2. What is a Microcomputer?
1.3. What is the power of a Microprocessor?

2. DECIMAL AND BINARY NUMBER SYSTEM

2.1. The decimal number system
2.2. The binary number system
2.3. Binary-to-Decimal conversion
2.4. Decimal-to-Binary conversion
2.5. The hexadecimal number system
2.6. Decimal and hexadecimal conversions
2.7. Binary addition
2.8. Binary subtraction
2.9. Two’s complement numbers
2.10. Binary Multiplication
2.11. Binary division
2.12. Multiple-precision arithmetic
2.13. Floating-point arithmetic

3. BASIC MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 7 hrs

3.1. What is the microprocessor’s architecture?
3.2. Word lengths
3.3. Addressable memory
3.4. The microprocessor’s speed
3.5. Other microprocessor architectural characteristics
3.6. The microprocessor’s registers
3.7. The microprocessor’s instructions
3.8. Memory addressing architecture
3.9. The microprocessor’s support circuits
3.10. Microprocessor development and maintenance systems

4. INSIDE THE MICROPROCESSOR 7 hrs

4.1. The microprocessor block diagram and programming model
4.2. The ALU
4.3. The microprocessor’s registers
4.4. The accumulator
4.5. The program counter
4.6. The status register
4.7. The stack pointer
4.8. The microprocessor’s general purpose registers
4.9. The memory address register and logic
4.10. The instruction register
4.11. The temporary data registers
4.12. The microprocessor’s control logic
4.13. The microprocessor’s internal data bus

45
5. AN INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTIONS 6 hrs
5.1. What is an instruction set?
5.2. Mnemonics
5.3. The microprocessor’s basic instruction types
5.4. The microprocessor’s addressing modes
5.5. Inherent addressing
5.6. Immediate addressing
5.7. Direct addressing
5.8. Register indirect addressing
5.9. Indexed addressing
5.10. Relative addressing

6. COMMUNICATING WITH THE MICROPROCESSOR 3 hrs

6.1. The need for microprocessor I/O
6.2. Connecting the I/O port to the microprocessor
6.3. Polling and interrupts

7. 8-BIT MICROPROCESSORS 9 hrs

7.1. An introduction to 8-bit microprocessors
7.2. A programming model for the Z-80
7.3. The Z-80 8-bit registers
7.4. The assigned registers
7.5. The Z-80 block diagram
7.6. The Z-80 instruction set
7.7. The Z-80 hardware
7.8. A programming model for the 6802
7.9. The 6802 instruction set
7.10. The 6802 hardware

8. A SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT MICROPROCESSOR 9 hrs

8.1. An introduction to single-chip microprocessor
8.2. The 8051 architecture and programming model
8.3. The 8051 internal ram and registers
8.4. The 8051 I/O ports
8.5. The 8051 interrupt system
8.6. The 8051 instruction set
8.7. Other microcomputers in the 8051 family

9. 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9 hrs

9.1. An introduction to 8085 microprocessor
9.2. Introduction to 8085 registers and internal data bus
9.3. Introduction to the instruction set of the 8085
9.4. Addressing modes of the 8085
9.5. Writing assembly language program for the 8085
9.6. Assembly language programs using conditional loops, unconditional loops and interrupts
9.7. Interfacing of the 8085 with external devices like RAM, ROM, Peripheral Interface
Adapter (PIA) and I/Os

10. 16-BIT MICROPROCESSORS 10 hrs

10.1. An introduction to 16-bit microprocessors
10.2. A programming model for the 8088
10.3. The 8088 registers
10.4. The 8088 addressing modes
10.5. The 8088 instruction set
10.6. The 8088 hardware
10.7. The 68000 microprocessor

46
 10.8. A programming model for the 68000
10.9. The 68000 addressing modes
10.10. The 68000 instruction set
10.11. The 68000 hardware

11. MEMORY 6 hrs

11.1. Random-access read-write memories
11.2. Static and dynamic memories
11.3. Two memory systems
11.4. ROMS, EPROMS, and EAROMS
11.5. Direct memory access
11.6. Paging and other memory extension techniques

12. MICROPROCESSOR I/O 7 hrs

12.1. An introduction to data communication
12.2. Parallel I/O
12.3. Serial communication
12.4. The serial interface and the UART
12.5. Serial communication lines
12.6. Modems
12.7. I/O devices
12.8. D/A and A/D interfaces
12.9. Special I/O devices

13. AN INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING 6 hrs

13.1. What is programming?
13.2. The programming process
13.3. The program’s specifications
13.4. The program’s design
13.5. Implementing the program design
13.6. The elements of a program (Algorithms and data)
13.7. Fundamental programming constructs
13.8. Documentation

14. SERVICING MICROPROCESSOR BASED PRODUCTS 7 hrs

14.1. Reviewing the service procedures
14.2. Finding the problem
14.3. Troubleshooting the specific module
14.4. Troubleshooting the power supply
14.5. Troubleshooting the CPU
14.6. Troubleshooting memory
14.7. Troubleshooting the I/O
14.8. Other troubleshooting hints
14.9. Using test equipment

47
AT-225 MICROPROCESSOR
T P C
Total contact hours: 3 6 5
Theory: 96 Hours
Practical: 192 Hours

Instructional Objectives

1. WHAT IS THE MICROPROCESSOR?

1.1. Define and explain the functions of a microprocessor
1.2. Define and explain the functions of a microcomputer
1.3. Explain the power of a Microprocessor

2. DECIMAL AND BINARY NUMBER SYSTEM

2.1. Describe the function of decimal number system
2.2. Describe the function of binary number system
2.3. Explain Binary-to-Decimal conversion
2.4. Explain Decimal-to-Binary conversion
2.5. Describe the function of hexadecimal number system
2.6. Explain decimal and hexadecimal conversions
2.7. Teach binary addition
2.8. Teach binary subtraction
2.9. Explain two’s complement numbers
2.10. Teach binary multiplication
2.11. Teach binary division
2.12. Explain multiple-precision arithmetic
2.13. Explain floating-point arithmetic

3. BASIC MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE

3.1. Explain the architecture of a microprocessor
3.2. Define and explain word lengths
3.3. Describe addressable memory
3.4. Describe a microprocessor’s speed
3.5. Explain other architectural characteristics of a microprocessor
3.6. Describe the function of microprocessor’s registers
3.7. Explain the function of various microprocessor’s instructions
3.8. Describe the memory addressing architecture of a microprocessor
3.9. List microprocessor’s support circuits and explain their functions
3.10. Describe microprocessor development and maintenance systems

4. INSIDE THE MICROPROCESSOR

4.1. Explain microprocessor block diagram and programming model
4.2. Describe the function of an ALU
4.3. Explain the purpose and use of microprocessor’s registers
4.4. Explain the purpose and use of accumulator
4.5. Explain the purpose and use of program counter
4.6. Explain the purpose and use of status register
4.7. Explain the purpose and use of stack pointer
4.8. Describe the function of microprocessor’s general purpose registers
4.9. Describe the function of memory address register and logic
4.10. Describe the function of instruction register
4.11. Explain the use of temporary data registers
4.12. Describe microprocessor’s control logic
4.13. Explain the function of microprocessor’s internal data bus

48
5. AN INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTIONS
5.1. Explain what is an instruction set
5.2. Describe mnemonics and their use
5.3. Explain the basic instruction types of a microprocessor
5.4. Explain various addressing modes of a microprocessor
5.5. Describe inherent addressing mode and instructions
5.6. Describe immediate addressing mode and instructions
5.7. Explain direct addressing mode and instructions
5.8. Explain register indirect addressing mode
5.9. Describe indexed addressing mode
5.10. Explain relative addressing mode

6. COMMUNICATING WITH THE MICROPROCESSOR

6.1. Explain the need for microprocessors to have I/O ports
6.2. Describe methods of connecting the I/O port to the microprocessor
6.3. Explain the process of polling and interrupts

7. 8-BIT MICROPROCESSORS
7.1. Introduce an 8-bit microprocessor
7.2. Explain the programming model for the Z-80 microprocessor
7.3. Describe various Z-80 8-bit registers
7.4. Explain the assigned registers of Z-80
7.5. Explain the Z-80 block diagram
7.6. Describe the Z-80 instruction set
7.7. List various parts and explain function of Z-80 hardware
7.8. Explain the programming model for the 6802
7.9. Describe the 6802 instruction set
7.10. Describe the 6802 hardware

8. A SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT MICROPROCESSOR

8.1. Introduce the concept and function of a single-chip 8051 microprocessor
8.2. Explain 8051 architecture and programming model
8.3. Describe 8051 internal ram and registers
8.4. Describe various 8051 I/O ports
8.5. Explain the 8051 interrupt system
8.6. Explain the 8051 instruction set
8.7. Introduce the other microcomputers in the 8051 family

9. 8085 MICROPROCESSOR
9.1. Introduce the 8085 microprocessor and explain its architecture
9.2. Introduce 8085 registers and internal data bus
9.3. Introduce and explain the instruction set of the 8085
9.4. Describe various addressing modes of the 8085
9.5. Explain how to write an assembly language program for the 8085
9.6. Explain use of conditional loops, unconditional loops and interrupts
9.7. Explain how to Interface external devices like RAM, ROM, Peripheral Interface Adapter
(PIA) and I/Os with 8085

10. 16-BIT MICROPROCESSORS

10.1. Introduce concept and function of 16-bit microprocessors
10.2. Explain the programming model for the 8088
10.3. Introduce and explain 8088 registers
10.4. Introduce and explain 8088 addressing modes
10.5. Introduce and explain 8088 instruction set
10.6. Describe 8088 as an IC and explain the signals going into and out of it
10.7. Introduce the Motorola 68000 microprocessor

49
 10.8. Explain the programming model for the 68000
10.9. Describe 68000 addressing modes
10.10. Explain 68000 instruction set
10.11. Describe 68000 as an IC and explain the signals going into and out of it

11. MEMORY
11.1. Define random-access read-write memories
11.2. Define static and dynamic memories
11.3. Explain two memory systems
11.4. Define and describe functions of ROMS, EPROMS, and EAROMS
11.5. Explain how to directly access memory
11.6. Describe paging and other memory extension techniques

12. MICROPROCESSOR I/O

12.1. Introduce data communication
12.2. Explain the function of a parallel I/O interface
12.3. Explain the fundamentals of serial communication
12.4. Describe the need and use of UART with a serial interface
12.5. Explain the three standard serial communication lines
12.6. Define and describe function of a modem
12.7. Explain I/O devices used for communication with humans and machines
12.8. Introduce how D/A and A/D interfaces are designed and built
12.9. Describe special I/O devices like speech synthesizers, speech recognition, joysticks

13. AN INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING

13.1. Explain programming
13.2. Describe steps involved in programming process
13.3. Explain a program’s specifications
13.4. Explain the process of designing a program
13.5. Describe steps to implement a designed program
13.6. Explain various elements of a program (Algorithms and data)
13.7. Explain the need and importance of using program building blocks
13.8. Explain the importance of documentation and how to do it.

14. SERVICING MICROPROCESSOR BASED PRODUCTS

14.1. Give a brief review of the service procedures
14.2. Explain how to find the problem
14.3. Describe the specific modules in a PC
14.4. Explain troubleshooting procedure for the power supply
14.5. Explain troubleshooting procedure for the CPU
14.6. Explain troubleshooting procedure for the memory
14.7. Explain troubleshooting procedure for the I/O ports
14.8. Explain other troubleshooting hints
14.9. Introduce students to the use of test equipment

50
AT-225 MICROPROCESSOR

List of Practicals
1. Number systems and codes
2. Introduction of microcomputer basics
3. Computer arithmetic and Boolean operations
4. Architecture of the microprocessor
5. Address decoding
6. Introduction to instruction set
7. Addressing modes
8. Introduction to Flow Charting
9. Simple programs to understand various addressing modes (part-I)
10. Simple programs to understand various addressing modes (part-II)
11. Program for BCD to Binary Conversion
12. Program for multiplication
13. Program for division
14. Program using conditional and unconditional loops
15. Programs using subroutines and nested subroutines
16. Implementing delay counters
17. Programs using interrupts
18. Interfacing with an input port
19. Interfacing with an output port
20. Interfacing with the Peripheral Interface Adapter (part-I)
21. Interfacing with the Peripheral Interface Adapter (part-II)
22. Interfacing with keyboards and a switch matrix
23. Controlling an electrical load using a relay
24. Interfacing with a ADC
25. Interfacing with a DAC

51
AT-233 AUTOMATION FUNDAMENTALS - II
T P C
Total contact hours: 2 3 3
Theory: 64 Hours
Practical 96 Hours

Pre-requisite: Successful completion of the Course AT132 , Automation Fundamentals - I.

AIMS. After studying the subject the student will be able to explain:

1. Principles of CAD/CAM.
2. Working of Industrial Robots and their applications.
3. Industrial Applications of Machine Vision Systems.
4. Principles of Flexible Manufacturing and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing.

1. NUMERICAL CONTROL AND CAD/CAM. 12 Hours

1.1 Advantages of NC:
1.1.1 Flexibility
1.1.2 Compatibility for Complex Work pieces
1.1.3 Facility with Large Work pieces
1.1.4 Reduced Jig and Fixture Costs
1.1.5 Quality
1.2 Machine Code:
1.2.1 BCD
1.2.2 Alpha Characters
1.2.3 Parity Bits
1.3 Axes of Motion.
1.4 Incremental versus Absolute.
1.5 Motion Control:
1.5.1 Point to Point
1.5.2 Contouring
1.6 NC Programming
1.6.1 Block Structure
1.6.2 Block Formats
1.6.3 NC Languages
1.7 Direct Numerical Control (DNC)
1.7.1 Conventional NC
1.7.2 Time Sharing
1.8 Computer Numerical Control.
1.9 Hierarchical Numerical Control
1.10 CAD/CAM

52
2. INDUSTRIAL ROBOTS. 12 Hours
2.1 Robot Geometry:
2.1.1 Degrees of Freedom
2.1.2 Articulating Configurations
2.1.3 Polar Configurations
2.1.4 Cylindrical Configurations
2.1.5 Cartesian Configurations
2.1.6 Work Envelope
2.1.7 Mobile Robots
2.2 Robot Drives:
2.2.1 Hydraulic
2.2.2 Pneumatic
2.2.3 Electric
2.2.4 Mechanical Gear and Cam
2.3 Motion Control
2.3.1 Axis Limit
2.3.2 Point to Point
2.3.3 Contouring
2.3.4 Line Tracking
2.4 Robot Tooling:
2.4.1 Grippers
2.4.2 Appliances
2.4.3 Part-Compliant Tooling
2.5 Programming.
2.6 Sensing Capability:
2.6.1 Gripper Pressure Sensor
2.6.2 Electro-Optic Force Sensor
2.6.3 Optical Presence Sensing
2.6.4 Robot Vision
2.6.5 Tactile sensing
2.6.6 Voice Communication
2.7 Performance Specifications:
2.7.1 Payload
2.7.2 Repeatability
2.7.3 Speed
2.8 Robot Utilization and Justification:
2.8.1 Labour Resistance
2.8.2 Economic Justification

3. MACHINE VISION SYSTEMS. 10 Hours

3.1 Image Acquisition:
3.1.1 Image Scanning
3.1.2 Lighting
3.1.3 Digitization
3.2 Image Analysis Techniques
3.2.1 Windowing
3.2.2 Thresholding
3.2.3 Histogramming
3.2.4 Shape Identification
3.2.5 Template Matching

53
 3.2.6 Edge Detection
3.3 Industrial Applications
3.3.1 Inspection
3.3.2 Electronics Manufacturing
3.3.3 Agricultural Applications

4. INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS OF ROBOTS. 8 Hours

4.1 Welding.
4.2 Machine Loading:
4.2.1 Multiple Robot and Multiple Machine Loading
4.2.2 Sequential Machine Loading
4.2.3 Forging and Die Casting
4.3 Spray Painting.
4.4 Fabrication
11.4.1. Drilling
4.5 Assembly:
4.5.1 Engine assembly
4.5.2 Electrical/Electronic Machine Assembly
4.5.3 General assembly

5. FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS. 8 Hours

5.1 Introduction.
5.2 Basic Elements of Flexible Automated Factory.
5.3 Flexible Production Systems.
5.4 Elements of FMS.

6. COMPUTER-INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING (CIM). 14 Hours

5.5 What is CIM.
5.6 Goals of CIM.
5.7 Modular Installation Of CIM:
5.7.1 Where to start implementing a CIM System
5.7.2 Modular Approach to Install a CIM System
5.7.3 Types of Modular Subsystems
5.7.4 Installing CIM by Vertical Approach
5.7.5 The Components of a CIM System
5.8 Elements of CIM’S Computing Technology:
5.8.1 How CIM Utilizes CAD
5.8.2 The Roles of Process Planning and Group Technology
5.8.3 Coupling CAM with CIM
5.8.4 Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems
5.8.5 How Robots fit into CIM
5.8.6 Automated Materials Handling

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:
5. Robots and Manufacturing Automation, C.Ray Asfahl, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
6. Flexible Manufacturing Manufacturing, David Parrish, Butterworth Heinemann.
7. Logical Design of Automation Sytems, Sander B. Friedman, Prentice-Hall International Edition.
8. Advanced Manufacturing Methods, Jerome H. Fuchs, CMC, Prentice Hall.

54
AT-233 AUTOMATION FUNDAMENTALS - II

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. NUMERICAL CONTROL AND CAD/CAM.

1.1 Describe the advantages of NC:
1.1.1 Flexibility
1.1.2 Compatibility for Complex Work pieces
1.1.3 Facility with Large Work pieces
1.1.4 Reduced Jig and Fixture Costs
1.1.5 Quality
1.2 Explain different Machine Codes:
1.2.1 BCD
1.2.2 Alpha Characters
1.2.3 Parity Bits
1.3 Describe different Axes of Motion of Machine Tools.
1.4 Differentiate between Incremental and Absolute conventions for instructing the NC
Machine Tool to execute a motion..
1.5 Explain types of Motion Control:
1.5.1 Point to Point
1.5.2 Contouring
1.6 Describe different formats of NC Programming
1.6.1 Block Structure
1.6.2 Block Formats
1.6.3 NC Languages
1.7 Explain the significance of Direct Numerical Control (DNC)
1.7.1 Conventional NC
1.7.2 Time Sharing
1.8 Describe Computer Numerical Control.
1.9 Explain Hierarchical Numerical Control
1.10 Explain the advantages of CAD/CAM

2. INDUSTRIAL ROBOTS.
2.1 Explain classification of Robot Geometry:
2.1.1 Degrees of Freedom
2.1.2 Articulating Configurations
2.1.3 Polar Configurations
2.1.4 Cylindrical Configurations
2.1.5 Cartesian Configurations
2.1.6 Work Envelope
2.1.7 Mobile Robots
2.2 Describe the types of different Robot Drives:
2.2.1 Hydraulic
2.2.2 Pneumatic
2.2.3 Electric
2.2.4 Mechanical Gear and Cam
2.3 Explain various categories of Motion Control
2.3.1 Axis Limit
2.3.2 Point to Point

55
 2.3.3 Contouring
2.3.4 Line Tracking
2.4 Describe types of Robot Tooling:
2.4.1 Grippers
2.4.2 Appliances
2.4.3 Part-Compliant Tooling
2.5 Explain Robot Programming.
2.6 Describe Sensing Capability on a Robot:
2.6.1 Gripper Pressure Sensor
2.6.2 Electro-Optic Force Sensor
2.6.3 Optical Presence Sensing
2.6.4 Robot Vision
2.6.5 Tactile sensing
2.6.6 Voice Communication
2.7 Explain Performance Specifications of Robots:
2.7.1 Payload
2.7.2 Repeatability
2.7.3 Speed
2.8 Describe Robot Utilization and Justification:
2.8.1 Labour Resistance
2.8.2 Economic Justification

3. MACHINE VISION SYSTEMS.

3.1 Explain Elements of Image Acquisition:
3.1.1 Image Scanning
3.1.2 Lighting
3.1.3 Digitization
3.2 Describe different Image Analysis Techniques
3.2.1 Windowing
3.2.2 Thresholding
3.2.3 Histogramming
3.2.4 Shape Identification
3.2.5 Template Matching
3.2.6 Edge Detection
8.1 Industrial Applications
8.3.1 Inspection
8.3.2 Electronics Manufacturing
8.3.3 Agricultural Applications

4. INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS OF ROBOTS.

4.1 Explain success of Robot Welding.
4.2 Describe Robot Machine Loading:
4.2.1 Multiple Robot and Multiple Machine Loading
4.2.2 Sequential Machine Loading
4.2.3 Forging and Die Casting
4.3 Explain how Spray Painting is a natural application of Industrial Robots.
4.4 Explain how a Robot can accomplish Fabrication
4.4.1 Drilling
4.5 Describe different Robotic Assembly Operations:
4.5.1 Engine assembly
4.5.2 Electrical/Electronic Machine Assembly
4.5.3 General assembly

56
5. FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS.
5.1 Introduce Flexible Manufacturing Systems.
5.2 Describe Basic Elements of Flexible Automated Factory.
5.3 Explain Flexible Production Systems.
5.4 Describe Elements of FMS.

6. COMPUTER-INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING (CIM).

5.5 Define CIM.
5.6 Explain Goals of CIM.
5.7 Describe the Use of Modular Installation of CIM:
5.7.1 Where to start implementing a CIM System
5.7.2 Modular Approach to Install a CIM System
5.7.3 Types of Modular Subsystems
5.7.4 Installing CIM by Vertical Approach
5.7.5 The Components of a CIM System
5.8 Explain Elements of CIM’S Computing Technology:
5.8.1 How CIM Utilizes CAD
5.8.2 The Roles of Process Planning and Group Technology
5.8.3 Coupling CAM with AIM
5.8.4 Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems
5.8.5 How Robots fit into CIM
5.8.6 Automated Materials Handling

57
AT-233 AUTOMATION FUNDAMENTALS - II

LIST OF PRACTICALS:

1. Draw the Block Diagram to show the components of an automated system.

2. Identify different types of Sensors in the shop.
3. Identify various types of Analyzers in the shop.
4. Identify different types of Actuators in the shop.
5. Identify different types of Drives in the shop.
6. Sketch a conventional machine tool and identify major parts.
7. Sketch an NC machine tool and label its major parts.
8. Draw a component on screen by using menu of shapes available.
9. View the component shape in 3 dimensional colour.
10. Practice to edit the component shape.
11. Use CAD Software and produce a computerized drawing-1.
12. Load the computerized drawing-1 into the CAM Software for program generation.
13. Dry run simulation showing the actual manufacture of the component-1.
14. Use CAD Software and produce a computerized drawing-2.
15. Load the computerized drawing-2 into the CAM Software for program generation.
16. Dry run simulation showing the actual manufacture of the component-2.
17. Use CAD Software and produce a computerized drawing-3
18. Load the computerized drawing-3 into the CAM software for program generation.
19. Dry run simulation showing the actual manufacture of the component-3.
20. Identify and sketch the major parts of the Robot in the shop.
21. Identify a variety of jaws and tools that can be attached to the pneumatic gripper
in order to carry out specific tasks.
22 Communicate with the robot system to control the robot’s position.
23 Communicate with the robot system to control the speed.
24 Communicate with the robot system to control the mode of operation.
25 Communicate with the robot system to control the program storage and retrieval.
26 Program the robot to move directly to limb positions set in position data.
27 Program the robot to move limbs relative to current position.
28 Program the robot to search a path until specified input is present.
29 Program the robot to memorize the position at which input was received for use in subsequent
steps of sequence.
30 Program the robot to follow a continuous path such as paint spraying.

58
AT-241 INDUSTRIAL MATERIALS

Total contact hours T P C

Theory: 32 Hours 1 0 1

Pre-requisite: None

AIMS: After completing the course the students will be able to develop knowledge
and skill to select and use the Industrial materials effectively and efficiently.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL MATERIALS 8 Hour

1.1. Selection of materials.
1.2. Types of materials.
1.3. Properties of materials.

2. IRON AND STEEL 8 Hours

2.1. Types of iron.
2.2. Classification and properties of cast irons.
2.3. Types of steel.
2.4. Alloy steel.
2.5 Heat Treatment.
2.6 Surface Hardening.

3. NON-FERROUS METALS AND ALLOYS 6 Hours

3.1. Difference between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
3.2. Types and uses of aluminum and its alloys.
3.3. Applications of copper and its alloys..
3.4. Types of other non-ferrous metals and their alloys.

4. PLASTICS 6 Hours
4.1. Different types of plastic materials.
4.2. Types and uses of thermoplastic materials.
4.3. Applications of different thermosetting materials.

5. COMPOSITE MATERIALS 4 Hours

5.1. Importance of composite materials.
5.2. How fiber reinforced materials are produced?
5.3. How metal matrix composites are made?
5.4 Uses of sandwich structures.

RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Judge, A. W., Engineering Materials, Pitman
2. Rollason, E. C., Metallurgy for Engineers, Richard Clay
3. Bullens, D. K., Steel and its Heat Treatment, John Wiley & Sons
4. Miner and Seastone, Handbook of Engineering Materials, Wiley
5. Higgins, Materials for Engineering Technicians, Edward Arnold
6. Jones, Mechanical Engineering Science, Longman
7. Benham and Crawford, Mechanics of Engineering Materials, Longman
8. Higgins, Engineering Metallurgy Parts 1 and 2, Edward Arnold
9. John, V. B., Introduction to Engineering Materials, Macmillan
10. Bolton, W., Engineering Materials, Heinemann Newnes.
11. Keyser, Materials Science in Engineering, 4th Edition, Merrill.
12. Flin/Trojen, Engineering Materials and their Applications, Second Edition, Houghton Mifflin.

59
MAT-241 INDUSTRIAL MATERIALS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL MATERIALS

1.1 Identify the factors involved in the selection of Industrial Materials.
1.2 Explain how materials can be classified. Give examples of the following types of
materials:
i. Metals
ii. Polymers
iii. Ceramics
iv. Composites
1.3 Explain the following properties of materials:
i. Mechanical
ii. Physical
iii. Chemical
iv. Manufacturing
v. Non - mechanical
vi. Economic
vii. Aesthetic

2 IRON AND STEEL

2.1 Explain the following terms used in iron and steel making.
i. Pig iron
ii. Cast iron
iii. Acid iron
iv. Basic iron
v. Wrought iron
vi. Ingot iron
vii. Steel
2.2 Describe the properties and classification of Cast Irons.
2.3 Differentiate between the followings:
i. Plain carbon steel
ii. Alloy steel
iii. Mild or low carbon steel
iv. Medium carbon steel
v. High carbon steel
2.4 Explain the types of alloy steels and describe the following high alloy steels:
i. High speed steels
ii. Stainless steel
iii. Maraging steels
iv. Hadfields manganese steel
2.5 Explain the following heat treatment processes.
i. Full annealing
ii. Normalizing
iii. Hardening
iv. Tempering
2.6 Explain surface hardening. Describe following methods of surface
hardening.
i. Case carburising
ii. Cyaniding
iii. Nitriding
iv. Flame Hardening and induction hardening

60
3. FERROUS METALS AND ALLOYS
3.1 Describe the principal characteristic properties of aluminum and types of its
alloys.
3.2 Describe the applications of copper metal and properties and uses of the
following copper alloys.
i. Brasses
ii. Bronzes
iii. Aluminum bronzes
iv. Cupronickels
v. Nickel silver
vi. Beryllium copper
vii. Cadmium copper
viii. Chromium copper
3.3 Describe the properties and applications of the following non-ferrous metals and their
alloys.
i. Lead
ii. Tin
iii. Magnesium
iv. Titanium
v. Zinc
3.4 Describe the following industrially used nickel based alloys:
i. Monel
ii. Inconel
iii. Nimonic
4. PLASTICS
4.1 Explain the properties of plastic materials.
4.2 Describe the applications of following thermoplastic materials:
i. Polyethylene
ii. Ethylene Copolymers
iii. Polypropylene
iv. Polyvinyl Chloride
v. Polytetrafluoroethylene
vi. Polyamides
vii. Polycarbonate
viii. Acetal
ix. Saturated Polyester
4.3 Identify the uses of following thermosetting materials:
i. Phenolic
ii. Amino - formaldehyde
iii. Polyester
iv. Epoxy
v. Polyurethanes
vi. Allyl Resin
4.4 Describe the main categories of polymer forming.

5. COMPOSITE MATERIALS
5.1 Explain the term ’composite materials’.
5.2 Describe the advantages, uses and types of fibers
5.3 Identify properties and applications of following composite materials:
i. Fiber - reinforced
ii. Metal Matrix Composites
iii. Cermets
iv. Sandwich Structures
v. Laminated Materials
vi. Reinforced Plastics
vii. Concrete

61
AT-253: ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS

Total contact hours: T P C

Theory: 64 Hours 2 3 3
Practical: 96 Hours

Prerequisite: Electrical Essentials and Networks (El .T. 114)

AIM. Apply the principles of operation and function of various electronic components and devices to
practical circuits.

I. Identify various electronics components/devices used in the field

of electronics.
2. Explain the principle of operation of various type of electronic
components/devices.
3. Identify the function of each electronic components/devices.
4. Identify the pin configurations of various electronics components/devices.
5. Identify specification of electronic components/devices.
6. Identify the use of electronic components.

COURSE CONTENTS.

I. VACUUM TUBES. 2 Hours

1.1 Introduction to various types of electron emission.
1.2 Diode, construction, operation and application.
1.3 Triode, construction, operation and application.
1.4 Cathode ray tube, construction, operation and application.

2. DIODES AND APPLICATIONS. 8 Hours

2.1 Biasing the PN junction.
2.1.1 Depletion region, Junction barrier potential
2.1.2 Forward and reverse bias.
2.2 Rectifier Diode.
2.2.1 Half wave and full wave (Bridge) rectifier.
2.2.2 Ripple factor, surge current.
2.2.3 Rectifier filter: L, PI and T filters.
2.3 Diode limiting and clamping circuits.
2.3.1 Single end and double end limiter.
2.3.2 Voltage multiplier circuit. (Doubler, Tripler, Quadrupler)
2.4 Diode Data Sheet
2.5 Common faults in rectifier.
2.6 Diode as a switch.

3. BIPOLAR JUNCTION AND FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS. 20 Hours

3.1 Transistor types and BJT construction.
3.2 Basic Transistor operation, Forward, Reverse Bias. Transistor current.
3.3 Transistor Parameters and Ratings
3.4 Transistor as a voltage amplifier.
3.5 Transistor amplifier, configuration, comparison and uses.
3.6 Transistor, modes of operation.
3.7 Transistor as a switch.
3.8 Transistor and IC packages and terminal Identification.
i) General purpose transistors (TO-I8, TO-39, TO-46, TO-52, TO-72, TO-23 AB)
ii) Power Transistor (TO-3, TO-218, T-220, T-225)
iii) RF Transistor.

62
 3.9 VJT Biasing Techniques:
3.9.1 The DC operating point.
3.9.2 The fixed base bias.
3.9.3 The emitter bias.
3.9.4 Voltage divider bias.
3.9.5 The collector bias.
3.10 Field Effect Transistor and Its Biasing:
3.10.1 Junction Field Effect Transistor (JFET).
3.10.2 JFET Characteristics and parameter.
3.10.3 JFET Biasing.
3.10.4 Metal oxide Semiconductor FET (MOSFET) types.
3.10.5 MOSFET Biasing.

4. SPECIAL DIODES. 12 Hours

4.1 Zener Diodes.
4.1.1 Zener Diode as voltage Regulator, percentage of regulation.
4.1.2 Zener limiting.
4.2 Varactor Diodes.
4.2.1 Varactor In Tuning Circuits.
4.3 Optical Diodes
4.3.1 LIght Emitting Diode(LED)
4.3.2 Liquid Crystal Diode(LCD)
4.3.3 Photo Diode.
4.4 Other Diodes.
4.4.1 Schottky diode, construction, Characteristics, uses.
4.4.2 TunneI Diode, Negative resistance region.
4.4.3 Tunnel Diode Oscillator.
4.4.4 PIN Diode
4.4.5 Step Recovery Diode
4.4.6 LASER Diode
4.4.7 IMPATT Diode.
4.4.8 Gunn Diode.

5. THYRISTOR, SPECIAL DIODES & TRANSISTIORS. 10 Hours

5.1 The shockley diode,
5.2 Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR)
5.3 SCR Applications.
5.4 Silicon Controlled Switch (SCS)
5.5 Diac and Triac
5.6 Unijunction Transistor (UJT)
5.7 Photo diode & Phototransistor
5.8 Light Activated SCR (LASCR)
5.9 Opto-coupler.

6. OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER. 12 Hours

6.1 Introduction to operational Amplifier.
6.2 The differential Amplifier.
6.3 OP-AMP Data Sheet Parameters.
6.4 OP-AMP with negative Feedback.
6.5 Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers.
6.6 Voltage follower.
6.7 Summing and difference amplifiers.
6.8 Introduction to 741 OP AMP.

63
AT. 253: ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES.

1. VACUUM TUBES.
1.1 Understand construction, working and application of basic electron tubes
1.1.1 Enlist various types of electron emissions with application of each of them
1.1.2 Explain function of a Diode using a labeled diagram of a diode tube.
1.1.3 List the type of cathodes, materials and their work functions.
1.1.4 Explain the construction and working of triode tube.
1.1.5 Explain the function of multigrid in electron tubes-(tetrode & pentode tubes.)
1.1.6 Sketch & label the construction of a cathode ray tube
1.1.7 Explain the working of a cathode ray tube (CRT)
1.1.8 List applications of CRT.

2. SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES.
2.I Understand principles, characteristics and application of various types of semiconductor
diodes.
2.1.1 Compare the energy band structure for conductors, insulators and
semiconductors.
2.1.2 Explain semiconductor doping.
2.1.3 List donor and acceptor materials for silicon and germanium.
2.1.4 Define majority carriers and minority charge carriers.
2.1.5 Explain the effect of temperature & light on the resistance of'
(a) intrinsic semiconductor and
(b) Extrinsic semiconductor
2.2 PN Junction Theory:
2.2.1 Draw a PN Junction
2.2.2 Define the terms depletion layer capacitance & diffusion capacitance.
2.2.3 Sketch the voltage-current characteristics curve for a PN junction.
2.2.4 Determine RF, rd, RR and Is from the diode characteristics curve.
2.2.5 List the typical values of barrier potentials for silicon and germanium diode.
2.3 Understand PN Diode Applications
2.3.1 list the uses of PN diode.
2.3.2 Explain half and full wave rectifier using a neat circuit diagram.
2.3.3 Define Ripple factor, surge current.
2.3.4 Explain function of rectifier (L, PI, T filters)
2.3.5 Define the terms limiter (clipper) and clamper.
2.3.6 Draw a diode limiter circuit.
2.3.7 Explain the working of a diode limiter / clipper (single end and double end limiter).
2.3.8 Enlist the applications of limiter circuit.
2.3.9 Draw a diode clamper circuit.
2.3.10 Explain the working of diode clamper circuit.
2.3.11 Explain its uses as voltage multiplier (doubler).
2.3.12 Explain the working of a voltage doubler circuit.
2.3.13 List the applications of voltage multiplier circuit.
2.3.14 Explain the operation of a diode as a switch.

3. BIPOLAR JUNCTION AND FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS (BJTs & FETs).

3.1 Understand bipolar junction and field effect transistors, its biasing and basic BJT circuit.
3.1.1 Draw and label physical structure and symbols for NPN and PNP transistors.
3.1.2 Show the four Operation mode of BJT and application of each mode
3.1.3 Compute the values of IE, and Beta (dc) for given value of IB and IC.
3.1.4 Explain the working of basic BJT voltage amplifier w.r.t. bias of junctions of
charge carriers and transistor currents.
3.1.5 Define transistor cut off and breakdown voltages.

64
 3.1.6 List four maximum ratings specified by manufacturers parameters of transistor.
3.1.7 Drive the expression for IC versus lB for CE. configuration in the active resistor.
3.1.8 Sketch the input and output static characteristics curves for common base
amplifier.
3.1.9 Repeat 3.1.8 for CE amplifier.
3.1.10 Repeat 3.1.8 for CC amplifier.
3.1.11 List the types of transistor structures.
3.1.12 Draw and label the Structure of epitaxial transistor.
3.1.13 Name the advantages of MESA transistor over alloy transistor.
3.1.14 Enlist the advantages of I.C. over conventional circuit.
3.1.15 List the three broad categories of BJTs with package types used for each.
3.1.16 Identify the high frequency limitations of BJT.

3.2 Understand BJT Biasing Techniques

3.2.1 Explain the purpose of dc bias in a transistor circuit.
3.2.2 Show how bias effects the operation of BJT
3.2.3 Draw and label load line on the characteristic curves for CE Configuration.
3.2.4 Locate the Q-point for linear operation of the amplifier.
3.2.5 List the causes of Q-point thermal instability.

3.3 Understand Basic BJT Circuits

3.3.1 Sketch the circuit for single ended CE amplifier
3.3.2 Draw the h parameter approximate model for CE arnplifier
3.3.3 Repeat 3.3.2 for CB and CC configuration.
3.3.4 Write down the expressions for a CE circuit for
(a) Ai, (b) Ri (c) Av (d) Ro (e) Ap and Gp.
3.3.5 Repeat 3.3.4 for CB and CC circuits.
3.3.6 Repeat 3.3.4 for CE with an emitter resistor.
3.3.7 Compute Ai, Ri, Av, Ro and Ap for CE, CB and CC configuration.
3.3.8 Compare the three BJT configurations.
3.3.9 Draw a Darlington pair (emitter follower) circuit.
3.3.10 Explain the working of darlington pair.
3.3.11 List the applications of darlington pair

3.4 Understand FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS

3.4.1 Explain the principle of the n-channel JFET using illustrations.
3.4.2 Sketch the construction of n-channel JFET.
3.4.3 Sketch & label a family of drain characteristics of a n-channel JFET.
3.4.4 Define the terms I Dss and Vp.
3.4.5 Explain the effect of change in VGS the JFET characteristics.
3.4.6 Explain above from 3.4.1 thu. 3.4.3 for p-channel JFET.
3.4.7 Define the major data-sheet parameter of a JFET.
3.4.8 Explain the principle of n-channel enhancement MOSFET.
3.4.9 Sketch & label the family of drain characteristics of n-channel enhancement
MOSFET.
3.4.10 Repeat 3.4.9 for n-channel depletion-enhancement MOSFET.
3.4.11 Sketch symbols for p & n-channel JFET, n-channel enhancement MOSFET, p-
and n- channel depletion- enhancement MOSFET.
3.4.12 List three advantages of n-channel over p-channel MOSFET.
3.4.13 Sketch the cross- section of V-MOSFET.
3.4.14 Explain the working of V-MOSFET.
3.4.15 Compare the V-MOSFET with other FETs.
3.4.16 List the applications of MOSFET.
3.4.17 Sketch the cross section of complementary MOSFET (CMOS).
3.4.18 List the applications of CMOS.

65
 3.5 Understand FET Biasing
3.5.1. Explain to FET biasing.
3.5.2 Draw DC load line and locate bias point on the family of drain characteristic
curves of JFET.
3.5.3 Draw a self-bias arrangement p-channel & n-channel JFET.
3.5.4 Set the Q-point for a self-biased JFET
3.5.5 Explain the Q-point stability of a JFET.
3.5.6 Show zero bias of D-MOSFET.

3.6 Understand Basic FET Circuits

3.6.1 List the three of configuration of FET ampIifier.
3.6.2 Sketch & label the circuit for CS-JFET amplifier.
3.6.3 Write down expressions for Av and Zi and Zo for CS
3.6.4 Repeat 3.6.1 thru 3.6.3 for common drain (CD) and common gate (CG) JFET
amplifiers.
3.6.5 Draw generalized MOSFET amplifier configuration.
3.6.6 Define (i) transconductance, gm (ii) drain resistance, rd and (iii) amplification
factor of an FET.

4. SPECIAL DIODES.
4.1 Understand the characteristics and applications of diode used for a special purposes
Zener Diode.
4.1.1 Draw the V-I characteristic of a Zener diode.
4.1.2 IdentIly the characteristic features of Zener diode.
4.1.3 Explain the working of Zener diode as voltage regulator.
4.1.4 Define the terms line regulation, and load regulation for Zener diode.
4.1.5 Derive formulae to find the range of series resistor (RS) and load resistor (RL)
for a Zener regulator for given variations in line voltage and current.
4.1.6 Solve problems to find the values of RS and RL for Zener diode regulator..
4.1.7 Use Zener diode in a limiter / clipper circuit.
4.1.8 List the other applications of Zener diode.

4.2 Understand the characteristics of a Varactor diode.

4.2.1 Identify the key parameters of varactor diode.
4.2.2 Enlist the applications of varactor diode.
4.2.3 Draw the circuit of electronic tuner of a receiver using varactor diode.

4.3 Understand the characteristics of Optical Diodes (LED, LCD and Photodiode)
4.3.1 Define the term optical devices.
4.3.2 List the name of opto electronic devices.
4.3.3 Explain the electroluminescence process in LED.
4.3.4 List the materials with colour of emission used for LED
4.3.5 Explain the effect of bias on the operation of normal and colour emissive LEDs.
4.3.6 List the applications of LEDs.
4.3.7 Describe the term Liquid crystal.
4.3.8 Explain the working principle of both types of LCD.
4.3.9 Compare LCD with a LED.
4.3.10 List the applications of LCDs.
4.3.11 Explain the operation of a photo diode.
4.3.12 Name the materials used for photodiode with their colour sensitivity
characteristics
4.3.13 List the applications of photodiodes.
4.3.14 Draw a circuit of photoelectric relay using a photodiode.

66
 4.4 Understand special diode (Schottky, tunnel, PIN, LASER, IMPATT, Gunn)
4.4.1 List main type of special diodes.
4.4.2 Explain the basic internal structure and working of a Schottky diode.
4.4.3 Name the primary application areas of Schottky diode
4.4.4 Explain the principle of tunnel diode using energy level diagram.
4.4.5 List the names of material used for making tunnel diode.
4.4.6 Sketch the construction along with symbol for a tunnel diode.
4.4.7 Compare the V-I characteristics of a tunnel diode with that of an ordinary.
4.4.8 List the applications of tunnel diode.
4.4.9 Sketch the basic parallel tunnel diode amplifier.
4.4.10 Sketch the tunnel diode oscillator circuit.
4.4.11 Explain briefly the working of circuit in 4.1.9 & 4.1.10
4.4.12 Show & label the three regions of a PIN diode structure
4.4.13 Explain the effect of bias on the resistance of PIN diode
4.4.14 List the names of the materials used for making PIN diode
4.4.15 Enlist the applications of PIN diode
4.4.16 Explain the term LASER.
4.4.17 Differentiate between incoherent and coherent light
4.4.18 Sketch the structure of double heterojunction semiconductor laser diode.
4.4.19 List the names of the materials with field of application for laser diode.
4.4.20 List the application of lasers.
4.4.21 Describe the working of laser diode and photo diode pick up system of disk (CD)
players
4.4.22 Explain Gunn effect in bulk semiconductors.
4.4.23 List the names of material exhibiting Gunn effect.
4.4.24 Sketch a Gunn diode construction.
4.4.25 Identify the formation of Gunn domain in a Gunn diode.
4.4.26 List the application of Gunn diode.
4.4.27 Give the name for acronym IMPATT
4.4.28 Explain briefly the principle of IMPATT diode.
4.4.29 Sketch the structure of IMPATT diode.
4.4.30 Explain the two behavioural effect of IMPATT diode to produce 180 phase
difference between the RF applied voltage and resulting current pulse.
4.4.31 List the merits and demerits of IMPATT diode.
4.4.32 Enlist applications of IMPATT diode.

5. THYRISTORS & SPECIAL DEVICES.

5.1 Understand thyristors, UJT and opto devices & their application.
5.1.1 Explain the term thyristor
5.1.2 Name the important thyristor family devices
5.1.3 Sketch the construction of shockley diode
5.1.4 Draw and label the forward v-i characteristics for a shockley diode
5.1.5 List the methods to turn off and turn on shockley diode
5.1.6 Explain the working of a shockley diode relaxation osciIlator.
5.1.7 Compare an SCR with a shockley diode.
5.1.8 Draw and label the schematic symbol for an SCR
5.1.9 Explain the turn-on process of SCR using transistor equivalent.
5 1.10 Sketch the V-I characteristics for SCR.
5.1.11 Interpret the SCR data sheet parameters.
5.1.12 Explain the phase-control of an SCR
5.1 13 Draw basic circuits for SCR used in the areas of
a) power control
b) switching and
c) protection
5.1.14 Explain briefly the circuits drawn under 5.1.13.

67
 5.1.15 Compare a Diac with a Shockley diode in terms of
a) basic structure
b) symbol
c) operation
5.1.16 Compare a triac with an SCR in terms of
a) basic structure
1)) symbol (operation)
5.1.17 Sketch the transistor equivalent circuit for a triac.
5.1.18 Explain the phase shift control of triac with a diac as a switching device as used
in light for UJT.

5.2 Understand Unijunction Transistor characteristic.

5.2.1 Sketch the structure of a unijunction transistor (UJT).
5.2.2 Sketch the equivalent circuit and symbol for UJT.
5.2.3 Explain the working of UJT circuit of 5.2.2.
5.2.4 Draw the V-I characteristic curve for UJT.
5.2.5 Draw a circuit for UJT relaxation oscillator.
5.2.6 List the three factors controlling the period of oscillation of a relaxation oscillator
5.2.7 Sketch a UJT time delay circuit.

5.3 Understand properties of Photo-sensitive Devices.

5.3.1 Compare a photo-transistor with a conventional BJT.
5.3.2 List the factors controlling collector current of a photo transistor.
5.3.3 Draw the circuit for forward and reverse acting light operated relay using
phototransistor .
5.3.4 Sketch the circuit of a photo darlington pair
5.3.5 List the requirements to turn-on and turn-off a light activated SCR (LASCR).
5.3.6 List the types of input devices normally used in an opto-coupler
5.3.7 List five types of output devices used in opto-coupler.
5.3.8 List the applications of opto-coupler.

6. OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER (LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT).

6.1 Understand the working and applications of operational amplifier.
6.1.1 Draw the block diagram and symbol for an operational amplifier (OP AMP)
6.1.2 Identify the function of each block of an OP AMP.
6.1.3 List ten important OP AMP parameters.
6.1.4 Define the terms (a) bias current (b) offset voltage for an OP AMP.
6.1.5 Explain the method of bias current compensation for an OP AMP.
6.1.6 Draw inverting and non-inverting amplifier using OP AMP.
6.1.7 Explain the inverting and non-inverting amplifier.
6.1.8 Identify the virtual ground point of an OP AMP for calculating gain.
6.1.9 Derive expression for voltage gain of both types of amplifiers discussed under
6.1.7.
6.1.10 Sketch the four modes of operations of differential amplifier.
6.1.11 Sketch a voltage follower circuit using an OP AMP.
6.1.12 Explain the working of an OP AMP comparator.
6.1.13 List the applications of OP AMP (741 OP AMP).

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:

I. Milliman "Microelectronic"
2. Floyd "Electronic Fundamentals"
3. Floyd "Digital Fundamentals"
4. J.D. Greenfield "Practical Digital Design"

68
AT 253: ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS

Total Contact hours:

Practical: 96 Hours.

LIST OF PRACTICAIS
1. Identify the various diodes, transistors & IC package, number system and terminals.
2. Draw the forward & reverse characteristics of a P.N. junction diode.
3. Assemble a full wave diode rectifier circuit with a PI filter & calculate the ripple factor of output
wave.
4. Assemble a double side biased diode limiter circuit.
5. Familiarize with a voltage quadrupler circuit.
6. Demonstrate diode as a switch with LED as a load.
7. Troubleshoot a faulty diode rectifier circuit.
8. Use a Zener diode as a voltage regulator with diode rectifier.
9. Assemble a double side Zener diode limiter.
10. Demonstrate the performance of power supply using IC regulator.
11. Use varactor diode in a resonant circuit.
12. Assemble a tunnel diode oscillator
13. Plot the input & output characteristics of a transistor in common base configuration.
14. Plot the input & output characteristics of a transistor in common emitter configuration.
15. Plot the input and output characteristics of transistor in common collector configuration.
16. Plot the transfer characteristics curve of transistor in CE configuration.
17. Consult data sheet for a transistor to study its parameters and ratings.
18. Assemble a transistor voltage amplifier and find its voltage gain.
19. Demonstrate the characteristics of CB, CE & CC amplifier using curve tracer.
20. Plot the characteristics curves for a common source FET amplifier.
21. Demonstrate MOSFET as a switch and study the performance
22. Plot the characteristics curves for SCR & UJT.
23. Assemble a light dimmer using a Diac & a Triac.
24. Demonstrate the working of an operational amplifier.
25 Assemble a differential amplifier using transistor.
26. Demonstrate the working of an operational amplifier.
27. Use of op-Amp as an inverting & non-inverting amplifier and a voltage follower.
28. Draw the frequency response of an op-amp.
29. Troubleshoot an operational amplifier.
30. Demonstrate the use of digital logic probe & logic pulser.
31. Recognize an open & a short TTL NAND gate in an IC using logic probe & pulser
32. Troubleshoot a combinational logic circuit using logic probe & pulser.
33. Troubleshoot a frequency counter using oscilloscope

69
3rd Year

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
MGM-311 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND HUMAN RELATIONS

Total Contact Hour T P C

Theory 32 1 0 1

AIMS: The study of this subject will enable the student to develop the management skills, Acquaint him
with the principles of management and human relations and develop Psychological approach to
solve the labor problems.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. INDUSTRIAL PSYCOLOGY 2 Hours

1.1 History and definition
1.2 Nature and scope

2. LEADERSHIP 1 Hour
2.1 Definition and types
2.3 Qualities of a good leader

3. MOTIVATION 2 Hours
3.1 Definition
3.2 Types (Financial and non financial motives)
3.3 Conflict of motives

4. MORALE 1 Hour
4.1 Importance
4.2 Development
4.3 Measurement

5. HUMAN ENGINEERING 1 Hour

5.1 Importance of human factor in industry
5.2 Man-machine system
5.3 Strategy for making allocation decisions

6. INDUSTRIAL FATIGUE AND BOREDOM 2 Hours

6.1 Definition and distinction
6.2 Psychological causes
6.3 Objective causes
6.4 Prevention

7. INDUSTRIAL ACCIDENTS 2 Hours

7.1 Psychological causes
7.2 Objective causes
7.3 Prevention

8. INDUSTRIAL PREJUDICE 2 Hours

8.1 Causes
8.2 Remedies

9. PUBLIC RELATIONS 2 Hours

9.1 Importance
9.2 Functions

77
10. GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING 2 Hours
10.1 Importance
10.2 Choice of job
10.3 During service

11. JOB EVALUATION 2 Hours

11.1 Importance
11.2 Methods
11.3 Job satisfaction
11.4 Work simplification

12. INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT 2 Hours

12.1 Introduction
12.2 Functions of management.
12.3 Subdivisions of management
12.4 Objectives of industrial management

13. PERSONNEL SELECTION 2 Hours

13.1 Recruitment of employees
13.2 Training
13.3 Effects of training on production and product cost

14. WORKING CONDITIONS 2 Hours

14.1 Importance and consideration
14.2 Effects on efficiency and per unit cost

15. TIME AND MOTION STUDY 3 Hours

15.1 Concept and importance
15.2 Sequence of motion study
15.3 Principles of motion study
15.4 Steps to time study
15.5 Determination of operations time

16. QUALITY CONTROL 2 Hours

16.1 Concept and advantages
16.2 Methods.

17. ROLE OF FOREMAN IN MANAGEMENT 2 Hours

17.1 Foreman's abilities
17.2 Duties and functions

BOOKS RECOMMENDED:

1. C.S. Meyers, Industrial Psychology, Oxford University Press, London.

2. Smith Wakley, Psychology of Industrial Behaviors, Mc-Graw Hill, New York.
3. GhuIam Hussain, Nizamat-e-Sanaat Aur Insani Rawabat, Ilmi Kitab Khana, Urdu Bazar, Lahore.
4. Andrew R. Megill, The Process of Management, William M New Man.
5. Richard N Omen, Management of Industrial Enterprises.

78
MGM-311 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND HUMAN RELATIONS.

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

At the completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. KNOW INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOWGY

1.1 Describe brief history of industrial psychology
1.2 Describe in detail definition of industrial psychology
1.3 State nature and scope of industrial psychology

2. KNOW LEADERSHIP
2.1 Define leadership
2.2 Describe types of leadership
2.3 State qualities of a good leader

3. UNDERSTAND MOTIVATION
3.1 Define motivation
3.2 Describe financial and non financial motives
3.3 Explain conflict of motives

4. KNOW MORALE
4.1 State importance of morale
4.2 Describe development of morale
4.3 State the method of measurement of morale

5. UNDERSTAND HUMAN ENGINEERING

5.1 Explain importance of human engineering in the industry
5.2 Explain man-machine system
5.3 Explain strategy for making allocation decisions

6. UNDERSTAND INDUSTRIAL FATIGUE AND BOREDOM

6.1 Define fatigue and boredom
6.2 Describe psychological causes of fatigue and boredom
6.3 Describe objective causes of fatigue and boredom
6.4 Explain measures to prevent fatigue and boredom

7. UNDERSTAND INDUSTRIAL ACCIDENTS

7.1 Explain psychological causes of industrial accidents
7.2 Explain objective causes of industrial accidents
7.3 Explain measures to prevent industrial accidents

8. UNDERSTAND INDUSTRIAL PREJUDICE

8.1 Define prejudice
8.2 Explain causes of industrial prejudice
8.3 Explain remedies of industrial prejudice

9. UNDERSTAND THE SIGNIFICANCE OF PUBLIC RELATIONS

9.1 Explain importance of public relations
9.2 Explain functions of public relations

10. UNDERSTAND THE NEED FOR GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING

10.1 State importance of guidance and counseling
10.2 Explain the role of guidance and counseling in choosing the job
10.3 Describe help of guidance and counseling during service

79
11. UNDERSTAND JOB EVALUATION
11.1 Explain importance of job evaluation.
11.2 Explain methods of job evaluation.
11.3 Explain job satisfaction.
11.4 Explain work simplification.

12. UNDERSTAND INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT

12.1 Define management.
12.2 State functions of management.
12.3 Enlist subdivision of management.
12.4 Explain objectives of industrial management.

13. UNDERSTAND TRAINING AND ITS EFFECTS

13.1 Describe the recruitment procedure of employees in an industrial concern.
13.2 Explain training.
13.3 Identify the kinds of training.
13.4 Explain the effects of training on production and product cost.

14. UNDERSTAND THE EFFECT OF WORKING CONDITION ON EFFICIENCY

14.1 Explain importance of working condition.
14.2 Describe air-conditioning, ventilation, lighting and noise.
14.3 State the effects of good working conditions on efficiency and per unit cost.

15. UNDERSTAND TIME AND MOTION STUDY

15.1 Explain the concept.
15.2 Describe the importance of work-study.
15.3 Explain the sequence of motion study.
15.4 State the principles of motion study.
15.5 Describe the steps for carrying out time study.
15.6 Explain the method of determination of operations time.

16. UNDERSTAND THE METHOD OF QUALITY CONTROL

16.1 Define quality control
16.2 State the advantages of quality control.
16.3 Explain methods of quality control.

17. UNDERSTAND THE ROLE OF FOREMAN IN AN INDUS'TIUAL UNDERTAKING

17.1 Explain ability of the foreman.
17.2 Enlist duties of foreman.
17.3 Describe functions of foreman as middle management.

80
MT-332 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Total Contact Hours

Theory 32 T P C
Practical 96 1 3 2

AIMS: At the end of this course the students will be able to:
(a) Understand the fundamentals of planning of the industrial concern.
(b) Understand and appreciate the methods generally employed in various
categories of manufacturing operations for economic production.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. INDUSTRIAL PLANNING 2 Hours

1.1 Need of industrial planning
1.2 Financial planning, product planning, process planning

2. SITE SELECTION OF INDUSTRY 2 Hours

2.1 Elements of site selection (labor availability, transportation, electricity,
Availability of raw materials, consumption products.)

3. PLANT LAY-OUT 2 Hours

3.1 Nature
3.2 Purpose
3.3 Types of plant layout and elements.

4. FACTORS INFLUENCING PLANT LAY-OUT 4 Hours

4.1 Raw materials, machinery, tools and equipment
4.2 Man power
4.3 Movement
4.4 Service
4.5 Building, plant modification, zoning
4.6 Process requirements
4.7 Safety
a) Man
b) Material/machines

5. PLANNING FOR MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES 2 Hours

5.1 Maintenance plan
5.2 Forms for schedule of activities

6. CLASSIFICATION OF MECHANICAL PRODUCTS 2 Hours

6.1 Classification and types of Mechanical products

7. COST 3 Hours
7.1 Item Cost
7.2 Total Cost
7.3 Cost comparison

8. PRODUCTION METHOD 2 Hours

8.1 Production
8.2 Types of production

81
9. JOB ANALYSIS 3 Hours
9.1 Motion Study
9.2 Time study

10. TOTAL LABOUR TIME 3 Hours

10.1 Labor
10.2 Calculation of total labor time
10.3 Flow process chart
10.4 Waste time study

11. PRODUCTION CONTROL 3 Hours

11.1 Routing
11.2 Scheduling
11.3 Dispatching

12. PRODUCTION TOOL 2 Hours

12.1 Jig
12.2 Fixture

13. STORE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 2 Hours

13.1 Receipt of stores
a) Raw material
b) Finished material issue of stores Indents, store cards
13.2 Issue of stores
13.3 Indents, store cards

REFERENCE BOOKS:

i) Motion and time study by Ralph M. Barnes

ii) Plant Layout and design by Moore

82
MT-332 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. KNOW THE BASIC PRINCIPLES OF INDUSTRIAL PLANNING

1.1 Define planning
1.2 Describe need of planning in industries
1.3 Describe financial planning steps and aspects in a general way
1.4 Describe product planning and product comparison
1.5 Describe process planning and selection of plan and equipment

2. KNOW THE SALIENT FEATURES OF THE SELECTION OF SITE TO A FACTORY

2.1 Define site
2.2 Describe elements for selection of site for specific production emphasis on elements like
(location of site, labor availability, electricity, transportation, rebate in taxes, availability of
raw material, consumption of product etc.)

3. UNDERSTAND THE PURPOSE OF PLANT LAYOUT

3.1 Describe the need and importance of plant layout
3.2 Describe the types of layout
3.3 Explain Elements of layout
3.4 Explain influence of nature of product as layout

4. FACTORS INVOLVING IN PLANT LAYOUT

4.1 Know the factors involving in plant layout
4.1.1 Describe Movement and supply of raw material to workshop
4.1.2 Describe space requirement for machinery, tools and equipment
4.1.3 Describe Process requirements
4.1.4 State zoning - building - change required for future expansion
4.1.5 State Safety requirements for
i) Man
ii) Men
4.2 Know the planning for layout
4.2.1 State method of gathering the facts about industry.
4.2.2 Describe the flow chart of process
4.2.3 Compare alternate layouts and recognize correct layout

5. PLANNING FOR MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES

5.1 Know the planning for maintenance activities
5.1.1 Observe schedule for maintenance on daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly and
yearly bases
5.2 Know the maintenance plan
5.2.1 Describe plan for emergency maintenance

6. UNDERSTAND THE CLASSIFICATION AND TYPES OF MECHANICAL PRODUCT

6.1 Define mechanical products
6.2 Explain role of mechanical products in planning

7. ROLE OF COST OF PRODUCT ON PLANNING

7.1 Understand total cost
7.1.1 Define total cost
7.1.2 Explain role of total cost on planning
7.2 Know item cost
7.2.1 Define item cost
7.2.2 Outline role of item cost on planning prime cost, overhead cost or finish cost

83
 7.3 Know the cost comparison
7.3.1 Define cost comparison with respect to planning
7.3.2 Outline the cost control with respect of proper planning

8. UNDERSTAND PRODUCTION AND PRODUCTION METHOD

8.1 Define production
8.2 Explain types of production like mass production, batch production and special order
production

9. UNDERSTAND DIFFERENT STUDIES INVOLVING JOB ANALYSlS

9.1 Define motion study
9.2 Describe the history of Gilberth
9.3 Instrument used in motion study like - stop watch - motion picture camera, etc.
9.4 Explain different symbols of micro-motion A.S.M.E. symbols and Therbliges.
9.5 Describe time study
9.6 State history of Taylor movement
9.7 Describe the use of time study
9.8 Describe time study equipment
9.9 State the points for time study
9.10 Explain time study with observation board.

10. UNDERSTAND THE TOTAL LABOUR

10.1 List the time calculated towards total time
10.2 Define operation, transportation inspection and maintenance time.
10.3 Estimate standard time for a job
10.4 Explain flow process chart.
10.5 Explain waste time study.

11. UNDERSTAND PRODUCTION CONTROL.

11.1 Describe routing, scheduling and dispatching.
11.2 Explain method of receipt and issue of material.
11.3 Describe standard forms used in stores.

12. KNOW PRODUCTION TOOL.

12.1 Define jig
12.2 Describe and explain fixture
12.3 Differentiate between jig & fixture
12.4 State uses of jig & fixture in production industry

13. KNOW STORE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

13.1 Describe issue receipt of raw product
13.2 Describe issue receipt of finished products
13.3 Describe indent and indenting
13.4 Describe store costs

REFERENCE BOOKS:

i) Motion and Time study by RALPH M BARNES

ii) Plant layout and Design by MOORE

84
MT-332 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

LIST OF PRACTICAL 96 Hours

1. Sketch layout of shops of Technology
2. Planning of shop layout
3. Draw and discuss administrative chart
4. Study of Institutes stores
5. Visit of cement factory/sugar mill/ghee/fertilizer Factory.
6. Preparation of process chart/flow chart
7. Preparation the chart of symbols:
a) ASME (American society of mechanical engineering)
b) Therebligs
8. Preparation of activity chart
9. Problems on time study
10. Preparation of process charts
11. Preparation of man land machine chart
12. Preparation of operation chart
13. Visit to production factory, paper and board miIIs, cycle, fan, pump, and sewing machine
Factory, etc.
14. Writing report critically analyzing the production process of the factory visited
15. Preparations of a chart for calculating the actual time spent on the job.
16. Preparation of an observation chart
17. Preparation of a job analysis sheet

85
AT-312 ACTUATORS, DRIVES AND LINKAGES

Total Contact Hours

Theory 32 T P C
Practical 96 1 3 2

AIMS: At the end of this course the students will be able to:
(a) Explain basic concepts of mechanics, and mechanisms.
(b) Identify Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems.
(c) Explain the operation of various AC and DC motors.
(d) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of pneumatic, hydraulic and electric actuators.
(e) Identify and explain the operation of gears, linkages and rods used in motion machine
systems.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. BASIC CONCEPTS OF MECHANICS 4 Hours

1.1 Statics
1.1.1 Statics of Rigid Bodies
i) Equivalent Systems of Forces
ii) Equilibrium of Rigid Bodies
1.1.2 Analysis of Structures
i) Trusses
ii) Frames and Machines
1.1.3 Forces in Beams and Cables
i) Various Types of Loading and Support
ii) Shear and Bending Moment in a beam
iii) Relationship between Load, Shear and Bending Moment
iv) Cables with concentrated and distributed Loads
v) Parabolic Cables
vi) Catenary
1.2 Dynamics
1.2.1 Kinetics of Rigid Bodies
1.2.2 Forces and Accelerations
i) Plane Motion of a Rigid Body
ii) Systems of Rigid Bodies
iii) Constrained Plane Motion
1.2.3 Work and Energy
1.2.4 Principle of Work and Energy
i) Kinetic Energy in Translation
ii) Kinetic Energy in Rotation
iii) Conservation of Energy
iv) Power
1.2.5 Impulse and Momentum
i) Principle of Impulse and Momentum
ii) Momentum of a Rigid Body in Plane Motion
iii) Conservation of Angular Momentum

2. BASIC CONCEPTS OF MECHANISMS 4 Hours

2.1 Kinematics Terminology
2.1.1 Mechanical Concepts
2.1.2 Motion Classification
2.1.3 Motion Characteristics

86
 2.2 Kinematics of Rigid Bodies
2.2.1 Rectilinear Motion
2.2.2 Angular Motion
2.2.3 Conversion between Angular and Rectilinear Motion
2.2.4 Summary of Motion Formulas
2.3 Mechanisms:
2.3.1 Four-bar Mechanism
2.3.2 Slider-crank mechanism
2.3.3 Quick-return mechanism
2.3.4 Sliding Coupler Mechanism
2.3.5 Genevas
2.3.6 Walking Beams

3. INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE COMPONENTS 6 Hours

3.1 Shafts and Couplings
3.1.1 Horsepower-Torque Equation
3.1.2 Torsion and Bending of Circular Shafts
3.1.3 Shaft Calculations
3.1.4 Flexible and Rigid Couplings
3.1.5 Universal Joint
3.1.6 Torque-Limiting Couplings
3.2 Mechanical Fasteners and Power Screws
3.2.1 Screw Thread Terminology
3.2.2 Miscellaneous Fasteners
3.2.3 Power Screws
3.2.4 Riveted and Welded Joints
3.3 Spring Design
3.3.1 Compression and Extension Coil Springs
3.3.2 Deflection and Design of Coil Springs
3.3.3 Series and Parallel Arrangements
3.3.4 Other Common Spring Configurations
3.4 Analysis of Cams
3.4.1 Types of Cam Configurations
3.4.2 Types of Cam Followers
3.4.3 Cam Terminology
3.4.4 Types of Follower Motions
3.4.5 Practical Design Considerations for Cams and Followers
3.4.6 Cam Calculations
3.5 Belts and Chains
3.5.1 Flat Belts
3.5.2 Angle of Contact and Belt length
3.5.3 V-Belts
3.5.4 Belt design
3.5.5 Roller Chains
3.5.6 Horsepower Capacity of Roller Chain

4. GEARS DRIVE SYSTEM 4 Hours

4.1 Introduction
4.2 Spur Gears
4.2.1 Rack and Pinion
4.2.2 The Internal Spur Gear
4.2.3 Basic Formulas for Spur Gears
4.3 Helical Gears
4.4 Herringbone Gears
4.5 Bevel Gears
4.6 The Worm and Wheel

87
 4.7 Ball Screw
4.8 Simple and Compound Gear Train
4.9 The Reverted Gear train
4.10 Harmonic Drive

5. INTRODUCTION TO HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 2 Hours

5.1 Hydraulic Power Supplies
5.2 Pneumatic Power Supplies

6. MOTION MACHINE ACTUATORS 2 Hours

6.1 Definition of Actuator
6.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Electric Actuators
6.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hydraulic Actuators
6.4 Advantages and Disadvantages of Pneumatic Actuators

7. ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVES 10 Hours

7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 Choice of Drive Systems
7.1.2 Selection of Drive for Individual Applications
7.1.3 Control Panel Requirements
7.1.4 Choice of Gear Ratio
7.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of:
7.2.1 Series wound DC motors
7.2.2 Shunt wound DC motors
7.2.3 Compound DC motors
i) Differential
ii) Cumulative
7.3 Operation, advantages and disadvantages of Permanent Magnet Motors
7.4 Operation of Printed Armature Motors
7.5 Operation of Brushless DC motors
7.5.1 Electronic Commutation
7.6 Operation of Stepping Motors
7.6.1 Armature Rotation
7.6.2 Bipolar Stepping Motors
7.6.3 Bifilar Stepping Motors
7.6.4 Calculation of Step Angle
7.6.5 Variable-Reluctance Stepping Motors
7.6.6 Linear Stepper Motors
7.7 Operation of;
7.7.1 AC Polyphase Motors (Review)
7.7.2 AC Servo Motors
7.7.3 AC Linear Motors
7.8 Operation of
7.8.1 DC Drives
7.8.2 AC Variable frequency drives

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Machine Design , Anthony Esposto and J, Robert Thrower,Delmar Publishers Inc.

2. Robots and Automated Systems, Robert L. Hoekstra, Delmar Publishers Inc.
3. Mechanism Analysis, Lyndon O. Barton; Marcel Dekker Inc.
4. Mrechanics of Machines, Hannah & Stephenson, Arnold International Ltd.
5. Robotics for Engineers, Yoran Koren;McGraw Hill Publishing Company.

88
AT-312 ACTUATORS, DRIVES AND LINKAGES

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. EXPLAIN BASIC CONCEPTS OF MECHANICS

1.1 Statics
1.1.1 Statics of Rigid Bodies
i) Equivalent Systems of Forces
ii) Equilibrium of Rigid Bodies
1.1.2 Analysis of Structures
i) Trusses
ii) Frames and Machines
1.1.3 Forces in Beams and Cables
i) Various Types of Loading and Support
ii) Shear and Bending Moment in a beam
iii) Relationship between Load, Shear and Bending Moment
iv) Cables with concentrated and distributed Loads
v) Parabolic Cables
vi) Catenary
1.2 Dynamics
1.2.1 Kinetics of Rigid Bodies
1.2.2 Forces and Accelerations
i) Plane Motion of a Rigid Body
ii) Systems of Rigid Bodies
iii) Constrained Plane Motion
1.2.3 Work and Energy
1.2.4 Principle of Work and Energy
i) Kinetic Energy in Translation
ii) Kinetic Energy in Rotation
iii) Conservation of Energy
iv) Power
1.2.5 Impulse and Momentum
i) Principle of Impulse and Momentum
ii) Momentum of a Rigid Body in Plane Motion
iii) Conservation of Angular Momentum

2. DESCRIBE BASIC CONCEPTS OF MECHANISMS

2.1 Kinematics Terminology
2.1.1 Mechanical Concepts
2.1.2 Motion Classification
2.1.3 Motion Characteristics
2.2 Kinematics of Rigid Bodies
2.2.1 Rectilinear Motion
2.2.2 Angular Motion
2.2.3 Conversion between Angular and Rectilinear Motion
2.2.4 Summary of Motion Formulas
2.3 Mechanisms:
2.3.1 Four-bar Mechanism
2.3.2 Slider-crank mechanism
2.3.3 Quick-return mechanism
2.3.4 Sliding Coupler Mechanism
2.3.5 Genevas
2.3.6 Walking Beams

89
3. INTRODUCE MACHINE COMPONENTS
3.1 Shafts and Couplings
3.1.1 Horsepower-Torque Equation
3.1.2 Torsion and Bending of Circular Shafts
3.1.3 Shaft Calculations
3.1.4 Flexible and Rigid Couplings
3.1.5 Universal Joint
3.1.6 Torque-Limiting Couplings
3.2 Mechanical Fasteners and Power Screws
3.2.1 Screw Thread Terminology
3.2.2 Miscellaneous Fasteners
3.2.3 Power Screws
3.2.4 Riveted and Welded Joints
3.3 Spring Design
3.3.1 Compression and Extension Coil Springs
3.3.2 Deflection and Design of Coil Springs
3.3.3 Series and Parallel Arrangements
3.3.4 Other Common Spring Configurations
3.4 Analysis of Cams
3.4.1 Types of Cam Configurations
3.4.2 Types of Cam Followers
3.4.3 Cam Terminology
3.4.4 Types of Follower Motions
3.4.5 Practical Design Considerations for Cams and Followers
3.4.6 Cam Calculations
3.5 Belts and Chains
3.5.1 Flat Belts
3.5.2 Angle of Contact and Belt length
3.5.3 V-Belts
3.5.4 Belt design
3.5.5 Roller Chains
3.5.6 Horsepower Capacity of Roller Chain

4. EXPLAIN GEARS DRIVE SYSTEM

4.1 Introduction
4.2 Spur Gears
4.2.1 Rack and Pinion
4.2.2 The Internal Spur Gear
4.2.3 Basic Formulas for Spur Gears
4.3 Helical Gears
4.4 Herringbone Gears
4.5 Bevel Gears
4.6 The Worm and Wheel
4.7 Ball Screw
4.8 Simple and Compound Gear Train
4.9 The Reverted Gear train
4.10 Harmonic Drive

5. INTRODUCE HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS

5.1 Hydraulic Power Supplies
5.2 Pneumatic Power Supplies
6. EXPLAIN MOTION MACHINE ACTUATORS
6.1 Definition of Actuator
6.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Electric Actuators
6.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hydraulic Actuators
6.4 Advantages and Disadvantages of Pneumatic Actuators

90
7. DESCRIBE ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVES
7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 Choice of Drive Systems
7.1.2 Selection of Drive for Individual Applications
7.1.3 Control Panel Requirements
7.1.4 Choice of Gear Ratio
7.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of:
7.2.1 Series wound DC motors
7.2.2 Shunt wound DC motors
7.2.3 Compound DC motors
i) Differential
ii) Cumulative
7.3 Operation, advantages and disadvantages of Permanent Magnet Motors
7.4 Operation of Printed Armature Motors
7.5 Operation of Brushless DC motors
7.5.1 Electronic Commutation
7.6 Operation of Stepping Motors
7.6.1 Armature Rotation
7.6.2 Bipolar Stepping Motors
7.6.3 Bifilar Stepping Motors
7.6.4 Calculation of Step Angle
7.6.5 Variable-Reluctance Stepping Motors
7.6.6 Linear Stepper Motors
7.7 Operation of;
7.7.1 AC Polyphase Motors (Review)
7.7.2 AC Servo Motors
7.7.3 AC Linear Motors
7.8 Operation of
7.8.1 DC Drives
7.8.2 AC Variable frequency drives

91
AT-312 ACTUATORS, DRIVES AND LINKAGES

LIST OF PRACTICALS

1. Determine the forces in all members of a loaded structure.

2. Determine the maximum deflection in a loaded beam and cantilever.
3. Verify the laws of Shear force and Bending Moment on a simply supported beam.
4. Determine the reactions of a loaded beam.
5. Determine the mechanical advantage of a Toggle Joint.
6. Identify and sketch all the couplings and fasteners in the laboratory.
7. Configure the arrangement of helical springs in series and parallel.
8. Plot the load deflection curve for a wire and hence determine the value of Young’s Modulus.
9. Determine the Modulus of Rigidity of a given material of a circular shaft.
10. Demonstrate the conversion between rectilinear and angular motion and vice-versa.
11. Identify and sketch types of gear trains and determine gear ratio.
12. Determine the velocity ratio, mechanical advantage and mechanical efficiency of a simple gear
train.
13. Determine co-efficient of friction of a leather belt in contact with a cast iron pulley.
14. Determine the work envelope of different machines.
15. Identify the electric motor types found on the motion machine (robot)s and transfer systems.
16. Document the Name Plate data of the above motors.
17. Configure the 8085 trainer as a stepper motor controller.
a) design and build an interface
b) connect the stepper motor
c) connect appropriate power supplies
18. Write a program that will allow the stepper motor to:
a) go clockwise 2 full rotations
b) go counter clockwise a rotation and a half
c) this pattern is to repeat until an external P/B is engaged
d) the external P/B must be interrupt controlled
19. Fully document all components of this assignment.
20. Use of D.C. drive.
21. Use the A.C variable frequency drive.

92
AT-322 FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUIDICS

Total Contact Hours

Theory 32 T P C
Practical 96 1 3 2

AIMS: At the end of this course the students will be able to:
(a) Explain fundamental principles of hydraulics and hydraulic circuits.
(b) Explain the fundamental principles of pneumatics and use pneumatic circuits.
(c) Explain principles of electro-pneumatic and electro-hydraulic circuits.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION TO PNEUMATICS 6 Hours

1.1 Gas Laws:
1.1.1 Boyle's Law
1.1.2 Charle's Law
1.1.3 Gay-Lussac's Law
1.1.4 Universal Law
1.2 Kinetic Theory of Gases
1.3 Calculation the followings:
1.3.1 Pressure
1.3.2 Area
1.3.3 Force
1.4 Types of Compressors:
1.4.1 Displacement Compressor
i) Reciprocating Piston Compressor
ii) Diaphragm Compressor
iii) Multistage Compressor
iv) Vane Compressor
v) Helical Compressor
1.4.2 Dynamic Compressor
1.5 Purpose of Intake Filters
1.6 Function of Aftercoolers
1.7 Purpose of Receiver Tank
1.8 Use of Pressure Switch
1.9 Why a Safety relief valve is included in a system
1.10 Purpose and types of Desiccant Dryers
1.10.1 Deliquescent Dryer
1.10.2 Chemically Regenerative Dryer
1.10.3 Heat Regenerative Dryer
1.11 Types of Pneumatic Actuators
1.11.1 Linear Actuators
1.11.2 Rotary Actuators
1.12 Pneumatic Flow Controls
1.13 Use of Pressure Regulators
1.13.1 Pilot Operated Regulator
1.13.2 The FRL
1.14 Operation of Directional Control Valves
1.15 Advantages and Disadvantages of Pneumatic Systems
1.16 Difference between Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems

2. INTRODUCTION TO HYDRAULICS 6 Hours

2.1 Principle of Hydraulics:
2.1.1 Hydrostatics

93
 2.1.2 Hydrodynamics
2.2 Terms used in Hydraulics:
2.2.1 Flow
2.2.2 Pressure
2.2.3 Ideal/Laminar Flow
2.2.4 Turbulant/Nonlaminar Flow
2.2.5 Non-Ideal Flow
2.2.6 Corona Effect
2.2.7 Vena Contacta
2.2.8 Unbalanced System
2.2.9 Balanced System
2.2.10 Mechanical Advantage
2.2.11 Friction
2.2.12 Pressure Differential
2.3 Calculation of the followings:
2.3.1 Pressure
2.3.2 Force
2.3.3 Area

3. ELEMENTS OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 6 Hours

3.1 Types of Hydraulic Tanks, Filters and Baffles
3.1.1 Vented Tanks
3.1.2 Pressurized Tanks
3.1.3 Purpose and Maintenance of Filters
3.1.4 Purpose of Baffles
3.2 Various types of Hydraulic Pumps in common use
3.2.1 Nonpositive Displacement Pumps
3.2.2 Positive Displacement Pumps
3.2.3 Fixed and Variable Displacement Pumps
3.2.4 Pump Volume
3.2.5 Pump Displacement
3.2.6 Gear Pumps
3.2.7 Vane Pumps
3.2.8 Piston Pumps
3.2.9 Calculation of Pump Output
3.3 Purpose and types of Accumulators:
3.3.1 Purpose of Accumulators
3.3.2 Types of Accumulators
i) Spring Loaded
ii) Weighted
iii) Gas Pressurized
3.4 Purpose and various types of Actuators:
3.4.1 Purpose of Actuators
3.4.2 Linear Actuators
3.4.3 Cylinder Design
i) Single Acting
ii) Double Acting Single Rod
iii) Double Acting Double Rod
iv) Cushion Ended Cylinders
v) Telescoping Cylinders
3.4.4 Rotary Actuators (Hydraulic Motors)
i) Gear Motor
ii) Vane Motor
iii) Piston motor
iv) Rack and Pinion Actuator
v) Slot and follower motor

94
4. PURPOSE AND TYPES OF VALVES 6 Hours
4.1 Purpose of Valves
4.2 Flow Control Valves
4.2.1 Needle Valve
4.3 Pilot Operated Relief Valves
4.4 Pressure Compensated Flow Control Valves
4.5 Check Valves
4.5.1 Pilot Operated Check Valves
4.5.2 Counterbalance Valve
4.6 Directional Control Valves
4.6.1 Open Center Closed Port Valve
4.6.2 Closed Center Closed Port Valve
4.6.3 Open Center Open Port Valve
4.6.4 Closed Center Open Port Valve
4.7 Servo Control Valves
4.7.1 Spool-Type Servo Valve
4.7.2 Single Flapper Servo valve
4.7.3 Double Flapper Servo valve
4.7.4 Jet Pipe valve

5. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC/ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC INTERFACING 8 Hours

5.1 Review the followings:
5.1.1 Difference between Polled I/O and Interrupt I/O
5.1.2 Operation of the SDK85
5.1.3 Operation of the 8255
5.2 Review the operation and appropriate use of the following;
5.2.1 Transistors
5.2.2 FETS
5.2.3 UJT
5.2.4 BJT
5.2.5 SCRs
5.2.6 TRIACS
5.2.7 Thyristors
5.2.8 MOVs
5.2.9 Diodes (surge suppression)
5.3 Describe the principle of:
5.3.1 Isolated Grounding
5.3.2 Common Point Grounding
5.4 Explain the operation of the following;
5.4.1 Reed relays
5.4.2 Control relays
5.4.3 Solid state relays
5.5 Describe the following Isolation Techniques:
5.5.1 Galvanic
5.5.2 Optical
5.5.3 Opto22

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS

1. VICKERS Industrial Hydraulic Manual, Vickers Incorporated, 1989

2. Technology of Fluid Power, William W. Reeves, Delmar publishers, Inc.

95
AT-322 FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUIDICS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. INTRODUCTION TO PNEUMATICS
1.1 Explain the following Gas Laws:
1.1.1 Boyle's Law
1.1.2 Charle's Law
1.1.3 Gay-Lussac's Law
1.1.4 Universal Law
1.2 Describe Kinetic Theory of Gases
1.3 Calculate the followings:
1.3.1 Pressure
1.3.2 Area
1.3.3 Force
1.4 Explain different Types of Compressors:
1.4.1 Displacement Compressor
i) Reciprocating Piston Compressor
ii) Diaphragm Compressor
iii) Multistage Compressor
iv) Vane Compressor
v) Helical Compressor
1.4.2 Dynamic Compressor
1.5 Explain the purpose of Intake Filters
1.6 Describe the function of Aftercoolers
1.7 Explain the purpose of Receiver Tank
1.8 Describe the use of Pressure Switch
1.9 Explain why a Safety relief valve is included in a system
1.10 Describe the purpose and types of Desiccant Dryers
1.10.1 Deliquescent Dryer
1.10.2 Chemically Regenerative Dryer
1.10.3 Heat Regenerative Dryer
1.11 Explain the types of Pneumatic Actuators
1.11.1 Linear Actuators
1.11.2 Rotary Actuators
1.12 Describe Pneumatic Flow Controls
1.13 Explain the use of Pressure Regulators
1.13.1 Pilot Operated Regulator
1.13.2 The FRL
1.14 Describe the operation of Directional Control Valves
1.15 Explain Advantages and Disadvantages of Pneumatic Systems
1.16 Describe the difference between Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems

2. INTRODUCTION TO HYDRAULICS
2.1 Differentiate between categories of Hydraulics:
2.1.1 Hydrostatics
2.1.2 Hydrodynamics
2.2 Explain the following terms used in Hydraulics:
2.2.1 Flow
2.2.2 Pressure
2.2.3 Ideal/Laminar Flow
2.2.4 Turbulant/Nonlaminar Flow
2.2.5 Non-Ideal Flow
2.2.6 Corona Effect
2.2.7 Vena Contacta
2.2.8 Unbalanced System

96
 2.2.9 Balanced System
2.2.10 Mechanical Advantage
2.2.11 Friction
2.2.12 Pressure Differential
2.3 Calculate the followings:
2.3.1 Pressure
2.3.2 Force
2.3.3 Area

3. ELEMENTS OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

3.1 Describe the types of Hydraulic Tanks and explain Filters and Baffles
3.1.1 Vented Tanks
3.1.2 Pressurized Tanks
3.1.3 Purpose and Maintenance of Filters
3.1.4 Purpose of Baffles
3.2 Explain various types of Hydraulic Pumps in common use
3.2.1 Nonpositive Displacement Pumps
3.2.2 Positive Displacement Pumps
3.2.3 Fixed and Variable Displacement Pumps
3.2.4 Pump Volume
3.2.5 Pump Displacement
3.2.6 Gear Pumps
3.2.7 Vane Pumps
3.2.8 Piston Pumps
3.2.9 Calculation of Pump Output
3.3 Describe purpose and types of Accumulators:
3.3.1 Purpose of Accumulators
3.3.2 Types of Accumulators
i) Spring Loaded
ii) Weighted
iii) Gas Pressurized
3.4 Explain purpose and various types of Actuators:
3.4.1 Purpose of Actuators
3.4.2 Linear Actuators
3.4.3 Cylinder Design
i) Single Acting
ii) Double Acting Single Rod
iii) Double Acting Double Rod
iv) Cushion Ended Cylinders
v) Telescoping Cylinders
3.4.4 Rotary Actuators (Hydraulic Motors)
i) Gear Motor
ii) Vane Motor
iii) Piston motor
iv) Rack and Pinion Actuator
v) Slot and follower motor

4. EXPLAIN PURPOSE AND TYPES OF VALVES

4.1 Purpose of Valves
4.2 Flow Control Valves
4.2.1 Needle Valve
4.3 Pilot Operated Relief Valves
4.4 Pressure Compensated Flow Control Valves
4.5 Check Valves
4.5.1 Pilot Operated Check Valves
4.5.2 Counterbalance Valve

97
 4.6 Directional Control Valves
4.6.1 Open Center Closed Port Valve
4.6.2 Closed Center Closed Port Valve
4.6.3 Open Center Open Port Valve
4.6.4 Closed Center Open Port Valve
4.7 Servo Control Valves
4.7.1 Spool-Type Servo Valve
4.7.2 Single Flapper Servo valve
4.7.3 Double Flapper Servo valve
4.7.4 Jet Pipe valve

5. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC/ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC INTERFACING

5.1 Review the followings:
5.1.1 Difference between Polled I/O and Interrupt I/O
5.1.2 Operation of the SDK85
5.1.3 Operation of the 8255
5.2 Review the operation and appropriate use of the following;
5.2.1 Transistors
5.2.2 FETS
5.2.3 UJT
5.2.4 BJT
5.2.5 SCRs
5.2.6 TRIACS
5.2.7 Thyristors
5.2.8 MOVs
5.2.9 Diodes (surge suppression)
5.3 Describe the principle of:
5.3.1 Isolated Grounding
5.3.2 Common Point Grounding
5.4 Explain the operation of the following;
5.4.1 Reed relays
5.4.2 Control relays
5.4.3 Solid state relays
5.5 Describe the following Isolation Techniques:
5.5.1 Galvanic
5.5.2 Optical
5.5.3 Opto22

98
AT-322 FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUIDICS

LIST OF PRACTICALS

1. Mount the pneumatic devices onto the sheet of plywood provided and sketch using ANSI symbols
the layout of your pneumatic board.
2. Using a manually operated DCV, make a cylinder extend and retract.
3. Using a manually operated DCV, make a cylinder extend, then another cylinder extend, then both
retract simultaneously.
4. Using a manually operated DCV, make a cylinder extend, make another cylinder extend, and a
third cylinder extend sequentially. All cylinders are to retract simultaneously.
5. Using a manually operated DCV, make two cylinders extend simultaneously, and the third retract.
6. Using a manually operated DCV, make one cylinder extend which will cause the motor to turn
clockwise. When the DCV is switched the first cylinder is to retract and a second cylinder will
extend, which will cause the motor rotate counter clockwise.
7. Use the manually operated DCV to operate the Pilot operated DCV, to cause one cylinder to
extend rapidly and retract slowly.
8. Use the manually operated DCV, to operate two cylinders. As one cylinder extends the other is to
retract and vice versa. The direction of rotation of the motor is to be controlled by a pilot operated
DCV and the motor is to go faster in on direction and slower in the other.
9. Using a solenoid operated DCV, extend and retract 2 cylinders, simultaneously. The second
cylinder is to cause the motor to change direction of rotation .
10. Using solenoid operated DCV's, and a pilot operated DCV) Cause the motor change direction of
rotation when one cylinder extends and the other retracts.
11. Extend and retract two cylinders using solenoid operated DCV's, but limit the stroke to half
extension using the reed switches in the cylinder. You can use micro switches as well
12. Mount the hydraulic devices onto the sheet of plywood provided. NOTE: the components must
be able to interact!
13. Sketch using ANSI symbols the layout of your hydraulic board.
14. Using a manually operated DCV, make a cylinder extend and retract.
15. Using a manually operated DCV, make a cylinder extend, then another cylinder extend, then both
retract simultaneously.
16. Using a manually operated DCV, make a cylinder extend, make another cylinder extend, and a
third cylinder extend sequentially. All cylinders are to retract simultaneously.
17. Using a manually operated DCV, make two cylinders extend simultaneously, and the third retract.
18. Using a manually operated DCV, make one cylinder extend which will cause the motor to turn
clockwise. When the DCV is switched the first cylinder is to retract and a second cylinder will
extend, which will cause the motor rotate counter clockwise.
19. Use the manually operated DCV to operate the Pilot operated DCV, to cause one cylinder to
extend rapidly and retract slowly.
20. Use the manually operated DCV, to operate two cylinders. As one cylinder extends the other is to
retract and vice versa.
21. The direction of rotation of the motor is to be controlled by a pilot operated DCV and the motor is
to go faster in on direction and slower in the other.
22. Using a solenoid operated DCV, extend and retract 2 cylinders, simultaneously. The second
cylinder is to cause the motor to change direction of rotation.
23. Using solenoid operated DCV's, and a pilot operated DCV cause the motor change direction of
rotation when one cylinder extends and the other retracts.
24. Extend and retract two cylinders using solenoid operated DCV's, but limit the stroke to half
extension using the reed switches in the cylinder. You can use micro switches as well.
25. Using the SDK85 as a controller develop a program that will extend a cylinder for 5 seconds, and
retract it for 5 seconds. Another cylinder is to extend for 3 seconds and retract for 3 seconds.
Each cylinder is to complete 10 cycles and the system is to stop. The process is to be controlled
by a Start/Stop station. There is to be an E-stop facility that is interrupt controlled.

99
AT-332 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

Total Contact Hours

Theory 32 T P C
Practical 96 1 3 2

AIMS: After studying this course, the student will be able to:
(a) Become familiar with using the DOS booting process.
. (b) Become familiar the role of the config.sys and autoexec.bat files in optimizing system
performance.
(c) Become familiar with the PC memory map under MS-DOS.
(d) Become familiar with and use the Memory Management features provided with DOS 5 or
better.
(e) Become familiar with PC I/O mapping and operation.
(f) Become familiar with the use of Interrupts and DMA in the PC Architecture.
(g) Describe the VISUAL BASIC 6.0 (VB6.0) environment
(h) Analyze a VISUAL BASIC 6.0 (VB6.0) program
(j) Use Labels, Command Buttons and Text Boxes
(k) Program in the VB6.0 environment.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. PC System 2 Hours
1.1 MS-DOS batch commands. in solving specific problems.
1.2 MS-DOS batch concepts to prepare autoexec.bat files specific to the solution of various
system problems.
1.3 MS-DOS configuration commands to prepare config.sys files specific to the solution of
various system problems.
1.4 Purpose and use of the followings:
1.4.1 device drivers.
1.4.2 the prompt statement.
1.4.3 autoexec.bat menuing features
1.4.4 config.sys multiple configuration features.
1.4.5 advanced batch and config.sys commands
1.4.6 caching
1.4.7 ram drives

2. PC Memory Management 2 Hours

2.1 Memory Concepts:
2.1.1 conventional Memory
2.1.2 expanded Memory
2.1.3 extended Memory
2.1.4 upper Memory
2.1.5 high Memory Area
2.1.6 upper Memory Blocks
2.2 Role and use of the following MS-DOS features in managing memory:
2.2.1 highmem.sys
2.2.2 emm386.exe
2.2.3 memmaker
2.2.4 mem.exe
2.3 Use of MS-DOS memory management features to :
2.4 determine how much conventional , upper, and extended memory are in use at any time.
2.4.1 load parts of DOS into the 64kB HMA
2.4.2 allocate expanded memory for programs requiring it
2.4.3 allow device drivers to be loaded into unused upper memory blocks

100
 2.4.4 manually or automatically free up maximum conventional memory
2.4.5 where in memory specific drivers and programs have been loaded

3. PC I/O 2 Hours
3.1 PC I/O Concepts.
3.1.1 I/O Port Addressing
3.4.1 Interrupt Driven I/O
3.4.2 Programmable Interrupt Control Unit
3.4.3 DMA Driven I/O
3.4.4 DMA Controller.
3.4.5 I/O Bus Standards.
3.2 PC I/O bus standards:
3.2.1 PC Bus (8 bit ISA)
3.2.2 AT Bus (16 bit ISA)
3.2.3 EISA
3.2.4 MCA
3.3 Explanation of the followings:
3.3.1 I/O Bus
3.3.2 Local Bus
3.3.3 VL Bus (VESA)
3.3.4 PCI Bus (INTEL)
3.3.5 Hardware Interrupt
3.3.6 Software Interrupt
3.3.7 Interrupt Vector
3.3.8 Interrupt Vector Table
3.3.9 Interrupt Service Routine
3.4 Dedicated I/O addresses for the ISA (8 bit) and ISA (16 bit ) busses.
3.5 Interrupt and DMA allocations and usage for the ISA (8 bit) and ISA (16 bit) busses.
3.6 How to select suitable I/O addresses when ports must either be added to a system or
addresses are required by an adapter card which must be installed.
3.7 How Diagnostics can be used to determine the available Interrupt Levels and DMA
channels in a PC.
3.8 How adapter cards which require and Interrupt level or DMA channel can be installed into
a PC without producing conflicts with existing equipment.
3.9. Steps required for a new adapter card to take over a hardware interrupt level.

4. VISUAL BASIC 6.0 Environment 1 Hour

4.1 VB6.0
4.2 Programming languages
4.3 Visual Basic's various editions
4.4 VB programming process
4.5 Explain starting VB6.0
4.6 Stopping VB6.0
4.7 Mastering the Development Environment by the use of the following:
4.7.1 Standards: the menu and tool bar
4.7.2 Form window
4.7.3 Toolbox supplies and controls
4.7.4 Form layout window
4.7.5 Explorer window
4.7.6 Properties window
4.8 Help utilities

5. ANALYZING VISUAL BASIC 6.0 PROGRAMS 1 Hour

5.1 Event-Driven Program
5.2 Control Events
5.3 How to analyze Sample applications

101
 5.4 Naming objects
5.5 Running applications
5.6 Where the code is.
5.7 Event procedures
5.8 Properties and event procedures
5.9 Use of VB6.0 Application Wizard

6. CONTROLS AND PROPERTIES 1 Hour

6.1 How to create an application from scratch
6.2 How the following use of the controls provide the interface:
6.2.1 placing controls
6.2.2 sizing and moving controls
6.2.3 setting properties
6.3 How to give users help
6.4 Named Literals
6.5 How to create an application without the use of the VB Application wizard.

7. EXAMINING LABELS, BUTTONS, AND TEXT BOXES 1 Hour

7.1 Control Focus at Runtime
7.2 Why the mouse and hotkeys need no focus
7.3 Related properties
7.4 Tab Order
7.5 Command Buttons and their properties
7.6 Labels and their properties
7.7 Text Boxes and their properties
7.8 Forms and their properties

8. PUTTING CODE INTO VISUAL BASIC 1 Hour

8.1 Coding basics
8.2 Data basics:
8.2.1 Data Types
8.2.2 Variables
8.2.3 Putting Data into variables
8.3 Use of Expressions and Mathe Operators

9. THE USE OF MESSAGE AND INPUT BOXES 1 Hour

9.1 Use of Functions
9.2 Use of MsgBox() and InputBox() functions
9.3 How to examine MsgBox() contents
9.4 MsgBox()'s Return Value
9.5 Use of VB6.0's Code Window Help utility
9.6 How to examine the InputBox() data

10. MAKING DECISIONS 1 Hour

10.1 Use of Comparison Operators
10.2 Use of the If Statement
10.3 Use of the If Statement's Else Branch
10.4 Use of compound comparisons with the use of Logical Operators
10.5 Use of Multiple Choice using the Select Case statement

11. LOOPING 1 Hour

11.1 Use of Do While Loops
11.2 Use of Do Until Loops
11.3 Use of Do....Loop While
11.4 Use of For...Next Loop
11.5 Early termination of loops

102
12. COMBINING CODE AND CONTROLS 1 Hour
12.1 How to place the initial form
12.2 Use of a Control Array
12.3 How default properties speed development
12.4 Where and how to add external code modules
12.5 Use of the Unload statement
12.6 How to write user Functions

13. LIST BOXES AND DATA LISTS 1 Hour

13.1 Use of the List Box Control
13.2 Use of Combo Boxes
13.3 Data Arrays and their use
13.4 Use of Control arrays

14. ADDITIONAL CONTROLS 1 Hour

14.1 Use of Option Buttons
14.2 Use of Frames and Option Buttons
14.3 Use of Check Boxes
14.4 Use of Scrollbars
14.5 Use of VB6.0's Clock for timer control

15. DIALOG BOX BASICS 1 Hour

15.1 Common Dialog Box)
15.2 How to add the Common Dialog Box Control
15.3 How to generate Common Dialog Boxes
15.4 Common Dialog Box methods:
15.4.1 Adding the file Dialog Boxes
15.4.2 Color Dialog Box
15.4.3 Font Dialog Box
15.4.4 Printer Dialog Box

16. MODULAR PROGRAMMING 1 Hour

16.1 Structured Programming
16.2 Calling procedures and returning from them
16.3 Coding of Subroutines
16.4 Coding of Functions
16.5 Use of Coding Arguments
16.6 Receiving data by reference (indirection) and by value

17. USE OF VB6.0'S BUILT IN FUNCTIONS 1 Hour

17.1 Which functions exist in VB6.0.
17.2 Use of the Numeric functions
17.3 Use of the String functions
17.4 Use of the Date and Time functions
17.5 Use of Data-Testing functions
17.6 Use of Data Conversion functions
17.7 Use of the Format function

18. VISUAL BASIC DATABASE BASICS 2 Hours

18.1 File concepts:
18.1.1 what is a File
18.1.2 opening Files
18.1.3 operating on Files
18.1.4 closing Files
18.1.5 deleting Files

103
 18.1.6 writing to Files using Write #
18.1.7 inputting to Files using Input #
18.1.8 line input records using Line Input #
18.2 Database processing concepts
18.2.1 what is a Database
18.2.2 Data Control
18.2.3 fields
18.2.4 control
18.3 Use of the Data Form Wizard

19. PRINTING WITH VB6.0 2 Hours

19.1 Printing process in the Windows environment
19.2 Process of preparing the user for printing
19.3 Printer Object and its properties
19.4 Printer object’s Print method:
19.4.1 Printing literals
19.4.2 printing variables and controls
19.4.3 printing expressions
19.4.4 printing multiple values
19.4.5 using fonts
19.4.6 spacing using Spc() and Tab()
19.5 Print job requirements:
19.5.1 EndDoc method
19.5.2 use of page breaks via NewPage method
19.5.3 use of Height property
19.5.4 use of ScaleMode

20. MENUS AND VB6.0 1 Hour

20.1 Use of the Menu Editor
20.2 Adding an application's Menu Bar
20.3 Naming Menu Options
20.4 How to add Pull-Down Menu Options
20.5 Menu Extras
20.6 How to connect Menus to Event Procedures
20.7 Copying Menues between Projects

21. THE GRAPHIC IMAGE CONTROLS 1 Hour

21.1 Use of Image Control
21.2 Preparing the image
21.3 Sizing the image
21.4 How to load pictures at runtime
21.5 Use of the Picture Box Control
21.6 How to animate pictures

22. TOOL BARS AND MORE GRAPHICS 1 Hour

22.1 How to use the Toolbox Window and how to add additional controls
22.2 Use of the Image List Control
22.3 How to finalize the Toolbar
22.4 Use of Line and Shape Controls
23. WRITING CORRECT APPLICATIONS 1 Hour
23.1 Kinds of errors that could be present in a VB6.0 application
23.2 Use of the Debugger
23.3 Use of Breakpoints
23.4 Stepping through the code
23.5 Use of the Call Stack Button and Call Stack window
23.6 Use of the Immediate window

104
24. VB6.0 AND ACTIVEX 1 Hour
24.1 Basics of ActiveX and the use of ActiveX tools
24.2 How to build ActiveX Controls using VB6.0
24.3 OLE processing
24.4 How to create Inserted Objects
24.5 Use of ActiveX documents

25. OBJECT BASICS 1 Hour

25.1 System Objects and their Methods
25.2 Difference between class and object
25.3 Using Collections and Object Arrays
25.4 OLE Automation

26. DISTRIBUTING APPLICATIONS 1 Hour

26.1 How to Compile an application
26.2 How to Set Project Properties
26.3 Use of the Package and Deployment Wizard
26.4 How to start the Package and Deployment Wizard
26.5 Use of Setup.exe
26.6 How to Uninstall the Application

27. ONLINE VISUAL BASIC 1 Hour

27.1 How to use the VB application wizard to access the internet
27.2 Need of an ISP
27.3 How to use the Browser
27.4 Use of Internet and Microsoft Internet Explorer related tools

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mazidi and Mazidi, The 80X86 IBM PC & Compatible Computers Volumes I & II Assembly
Language, Design and Interfacing
2. Perry and Hettihewa, Sams Teach Yourself Visual Basic 6 in 24 Hours

105
AT-332 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. PC System
1.1 Explain MS-DOS batch commands and their use in solving specific problems.
1.2 Use MS-DOS batch concepts to prepare autoexec.bat files specific to the solution of
various system problems.
1.3 Use MS-DOS configuration commands to prepare config.sys files specific to the solution
of various system problems.
1.4 Explain the purpose of and how to use:
1.4.1 device drivers
1.4.2 the prompt statement
1.4.3 autoexec.bat menuing features
1.4.4 config.sys multiple configuration features.
1.4.5 advanced batch and config.sys commands
1.4.6 caching
1.4.7 ram drives

2. PC Memory Management
2.1 Explain the following memory concepts:
2.1.1 conventional Memory
2.1.2 expanded Memory
2.1.3 extended Memory
2.1.4 upper Memory
2.1.5 high Memory Area
2.1.6 upper Memory Blocks
2.2 Explain the role of and use the following MS-DOS features in managing memory:
2.2.1 highmem.sys
2.2.2 emm386.exe
2.2.3 memmaker
2.2.4 mem.exe
2.3 Show how MS-DOS memory management features can be used to :
2.3.1 determine how much conventional , upper, and extended memory are in use at
any time.
2.3.2 load parts of DOS into the 64kB HMA.
2.3.3 allocate expanded memory for programs requiring it.
2.3.4 allow device drivers to be loaded into unused upper memory blocks.
2.3.5 manually or automatically free up maximum conventional memory.
2.3.6 where in memory specific drivers and programs have been loaded.

3. PC I/O
3.1 Explain the following PC I/O Concepts.
3.1.1 I/O Port Addressing
3.1.2 Interrupt Driven I/O
3.1.3 Programmable Interrupt Control Unit
3.1.4 DMA Driven I/O
3.1.5 DMA Controller.
3.1.6 I/O Bus Standards.
3.2 Explain the following PC I/O bus standards:
3.2.1 PC Bus (8 bit ISA)
3.2.2 AT Bus (16 bit ISA)
3.2.3 EISA
3.2.4 MCA
3.3 Explain what is meant by the following:
3.3.1 I/O Bus

106
 3.3.2 Local Bus
3.3.3 VL Bus (VESA)
3.3.4 PCI Bus (INTEL)
3.3.5 Hardware Interrupt
3.3.6 Software Interrupt
3.3.7 Interrupt Vector
3.3.8 Interrupt Vector Table
3.3.9 Interrupt Service Routine
3.4 Explain the dedicated I/O addresses for the ISA (8 bit) and ISA (16 bit ) busses.
3.5 Explain the Interrupt and DMA allocations and usage for the ISA (8 bit) and ISA (16 bit)
busses.
3.6 Explain how to select suitable I/O addresses when ports must either be added to a
system or addresses are required by an adapter card which must be installed.
3.7 Explain how Diagnostics can be used to determine the available Interrupt Levels and
DMA channels in a PC.
3.8 Explain how adapter cards which require and Interrupt level or DMA channel can be
installed into a PC without producing conflicts with existing equipment.
3.9 Explain the steps required for a new adapter card to take over a hardware interrupt level.

4. VISUAL BASIC 6.0 Environment

4.1 Explain what VB6.0 is about
4.2 Describe programming languages
4.3 Explain Visual Basic's various editions
4.4 Explain the VB programming process
4.5 Explain starting VB6.0
4.6 Explain stopping VB6.0
4.7 Describe mastering the Development Environment by the use of the following:
4.7.1 Standards: the menu and tool bar
4.7.2 Form window
4.7.3 Toolbox supplies and controls
4.7.4 Form layout window
4.7.5 Explorer window
4.7.6 Properties window
4.8 Describe the Help utilities

5. ANALYZING VISUAL BASIC 6.0 PROGRAMS

5.1 Explain an Event-Driven Program
5.2 Describe Control Events
5.3 Explain how to analyze Sample applications
5.4 Explain naming objects
5.5 Explain Running applications
5.6 Describe where the code is.
5.7 Explain event procedures
5.8 Describe properties and event procedures
5.9 Explain the use of VB6.0 Application Wizard

6. CONTROLS AND PROPERTIES

6.1 Describe how to create an application from scratch
6.2 Explain how the following use of the controls provide the interface:
6.2.1 placing controls
6.2.2 sizing and moving controls
6.2.3 setting properties
6.3 Explain how to give users help
6.4 Describe Named Literals
6.5 Describe how to create an application without the use of the VB Application wizard.

107
7. EXAMINING LABELS, BUTTONS, AND TEXT BOXES
7.1 Explain the term Control Focus at Runtime
7.2 Explain why the mouse and hotkeys need no focus
7.3 Explain related properties
7.4 Explain the term Tab Order
7.5 Describe the Command Buttons and their properties
7.6 Describe Labels and their properties
7.7 Describe Text Boxes and their properties
7.8 Explain Forms and their properties

8. PUTTING CODE INTO VISUAL BASIC

8.1 Explain coding basics
8.2 Describe the following Data basics:
8.2.1 Data Types
8.2.2 Variables
8.2.3 Putting Data into variables
8.3 Describe the use of Expressions and Math Operators

9. THE USE OF MESSAGE AND INPUT BOXES

9.1 Explain the use of Functions
9.2 Describe the use of MsgBox() and InputBox() functions
9.3 Explain how to examine MsgBox() contents
9.4 Describe MsgBox()'s Return Value
9.5 Explain the use of VB6.0's Code Window Help utility
9.6 Explain how to examine the InputBox() data

10 MAKING DECISIONS
10.1 Describe the use of Comparison Operators
10.2 Explain the use of the If Statement
10.3 Explain the use of the If Statement's Else Branch
10.4 Describe the use of compound comparisons with the use of Logical Operators
10.5 Explain the use of Multiple Choice using the Select Case statement

11. LOOPING
11.1 Explain the use of Do While Loops
11.2 Explain the use of Do Until Loops
11.3 Explain the use of Do....Loop While
11.4 Explain the use of For...Next Loop
11.5 Describe the early termination of loops

12. COMBINING CODE AND CONTROLS

12.1 Explain how to place the initial form
12.2 Explain the use of a Control Array
12.3 Explain how default properties speed development
12.4 Explain where and how to add external code modules
12.5 Explain the use of the Unload statement
12.6 Describe how to write user Functions

13. LIST BOXES AND DATA LISTS

13.1 Explain the use of the List Box Control
13.2 Explain the use of Combo Boxes
13.3 Describe Data Arrays and their use
13.4 Explain the use of Control arrays

14. ADDITIONAL CONTROLS

14.1 Explain the use of Option Buttons

108
 14.2 Explain the use of Frames and Option Buttons
14.3 Explain the use of Check Boxes
14.4 Explain the use of Scrollbars
14.5 Explain the use of VB6.0's Clock for timer control

15. DIALOG BOX BASICS

15.1 Explain what the common Dialog Box does.
15.2 Explain how to add the Common Dialog Box Control
15.3 Describe how to generate Common Dialog Boxes
15.4 Describe the following Common Dialog Box methods:
15.4.1 Adding the file Dialog Boxes
15.4.2 Color Dialog Box
15.4.3 Font Dialog Box
15.4.4 Printer Dialog Box

16. MODULAR PROGRAMMING

16.1 Describe Structured Programming
16.2 Explain calling procedures and returning from them
16.3 Explain the coding of Subroutines
16.4 Explain the coding of Functions
16.5 Explain the use of Coding Arguments
16.6 Explain receiving data by reference (indirection) and by value

17. USE OF VB6.0'S BUILT IN FUNCTIONS

17.1 Explain which functions exist in VB6.0.
17.2 Explain the use of the Numeric functions
17.3 Explain the use of the String functions
17.4 Explain the use of the Date and Time functions
17.5 Explain the use of Data-Testing functions
17.6 Explain the use of Data Conversion functions
17.7 Explain the use of the Format function

18. VISUAL BASIC DATABASE BASICS

18.1 Explain the following File concepts:
18.1.1 what is a File
18.1.2 opening Files
18.1.3 operating on Files
18.1.4 closing Files
18.1.5 deleting Files
18.1.6 writing to Files using Write #
18.1.7 inputting to Files using Input #
18.1.8 line input records using Line Input #
18.2 Explain the following Database processing concepts
18.2.1 what is a Database
18.2.2 Data Control
18.2.3 fields
18.2.4 control
18.3 Explain the use of the Data Form Wizard

19. PRINTING WITH VB6.0

19.1 Describe the printing process in the Windows environment
19.2 Explain the process of preparing the user for printing
19.3 Explain the Printer Object and its properties
19.4 Explain the following Printer object’s Print method:
19.4.1 Printing literals
19.4.2 printing variables and controls

109
 19.4.3 printing expressions
19.4.4 printing multiple values
19.4.5 using fonts
19.4.6 spacing using Spc() and Tab()
19.5 Describe the following print job requirements:
19.5.1 EndDoc method
19.5.2 use of page breaks via NewPage method
19.5.3 use of Height property
19.5.4 use of ScaleMode

20. MENUS AND VB6.0

20.1 Explain the use of the Menu Editor
20.2 Explain adding an application's Menu Bar
20.3 Explain naming Menu Options
20.4 Explain how to add Pull-Down Menu Options
20.5 Explain Menu Extras
20.6 Explain how to connect Menus to Event Procedures
20.7 Explain copying Menues between Projects

21. THE GRAPHIC IMAGE CONTROLS

21.1 Explain the use of Image Control
21.2 Describe preparing the image
21.3 Describe sizing the image
21.4 Explain how to load pictures at runtime
21.5 Explain the use of the Picture Box Control
21.6 Explain how to animate pictures

22. TOOL BARS AND MORE GRAPHICS

22.1 Explain how to use the Toolbox Window and how to add additional controls
22.2 Explain the use of the Image List Control
22.3 Explain how to finalize the Toolbar
22.4 Explain the use of Line and Shape Controls

23. WRITING CORRECT APPLICATIONS

23.1 Explain the kinds of errors that could be present in a VB6.0 application
23.2 Explain the use of the Debugger
23.3 Explain the use of Breakpoints
23.4 Explain Stepping through the code
23.5 Explain the use of the Call Stack Button and Call Stack window
23.6 Explain the use of the Immediate window

24. VB6.0 AND ACTIVEX

24.1 Explain the basics of ActiveX and the use of ActiveX tools
24.2 Explain how to build ActiveX Controls using VB6.0
24.3 Explain OLE processing
24.4 Explain how to create Inserted Objects
24.5 Explain the use of ActiveX documents

25. OBJECT BASICS

25.1 Explain the System Objects and their Methods
25.2 Explain the difference between class and object
25.3 Explain using Collections and Object Arrays
25.4 Explain OLE Automation

26. DISTRIBUTING APPLICATIONS

26.1 Explain how to Compile an application

110
 26.2 Explain how to Set Project Properties
26.3 Explain the use of the Package and Deployment Wizard
26.4 Explain how to start the Package and Deployment Wizard
26.5 Explain the use of Setup.exe
26.6 Explain how to Uninstall the Application

27. ONLINE VISUAL BASIC

27.1 Explain how to use the VB application wizard to access the internet
27.2 Explain the need of an ISP
27.3 Explain how to use the Browser
27.4 Explain the use of Internet and Microsoft Internet Explorer related tools

111
AT-332 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

LIST OF PRACTICALS

1. Using the references, perform the lab exercises provided using MS-DOS 5 or better.
2. Examine autoexec.bat and config.sys files in laboratory machines.
3. Using references perform the lab exercises provided using MS-DOS 5 or better.
4. Perform Memory Management on the lab machines provided.
5. Using the references provided, determine existing Interrupt and DMA assignments on lab
machines.
6. Install a Data Acquisition System by correctly selecting and applying appropriate I/O addresses,
Interrupt and DMA selections.
7. Build and connect discrete interfaces using a PC Experimenters card selecting appropriate
address ranges to avoid conflicts.
8. Use the VB6.0 environment, try the various windows and tools in the Toolbox.
9. Analyze the interest rate project (on CD ROM)
10. Use the VB6.0 Application Wizard, test the features.
11. Create a project from scratch.
12. Create an application with 2 command buttons, one label.
13. Write a VB application that displays an appropriate title, asks the user for his name and add a
command button or press esc key to terminate the application.
14. Create an application with 5 command buttons. Reverse the focus order, and use the Tab key to
flow upward through the command buttons.
15. Write an application that uses displays and the Caption property.
16. Write code that declares variables.
17. Write an application that accepts your age and when a command button is clicked the age is
converted into Dog Years (7:1 ratio).
18. Use remarks to calculate sales tax where the three remarks hold your personal data, date, and
purpose of the program respectively.
19. Write an input box function.
20. Rewrite a nested if statement using a single if with a logical operator.
21. Rewrite an if statement to eliminate a Not and clarify the code.
22. Write a program that contains a labeled text box and a command button using a For Loop
to control a beeper.
23. Rewrite previous program that will generate an error message box under
specified conditions
24. Use form properties to resize a form.
25. Add input box routines to an application and use an error message to detect errors in the data.
Use a Do...While Loop to display the error until corrected.
26. Write an application that builds a list as the user enters values using a Combo Box control. Add a
command button that allows the user to add to the list.
27. Write an application that contains 4 command buttons. Use a Select Case statement to determine
which property should be changed based on the event procedure's Index argument.
28. Create an application using 3-option button arrays.
29. Modify the previous application so the font is affected via checkbox controls. Use the Timer
property to affect the font.
30. Use Ctrl T to activate the Components dialog box to add/delete controls to your toolbox)
31. Write a simple Color dialog box application activated via clicking a command button. The
command button's BackColor property will set the users' selected color.
32. Using the application of 2, click the Define Custom Colors button to see how the Color Dialog box
changes.
33. Use the File Open dialog box)
34. Write a general-purpose standard function procedure that accepts a numeric integer argument
and returns that argument multiplied by 10.
35. Write a standard procedure that accepts 3 single-precision arguments and
displays those 3 values in labels.

112
36. Write a string array program.
37. Write a program to calculate the time a user worked on a program.
38. Write a program that will determine the retirement date of the user. (assume retirement at age
60).
39. Write a program using Write # and Input # to create a data base.
40. Write a database application that displays book titles.
41. Use the Data Form Wizard to generate a table.
42. Write the Print method to print a specified character.
43. Write a program that will print specified characters when the user clicks a command button.
44. Use the Print command button to print specified data.
45. Create a new project with specified menu bar items.
46. Add specified menu items to a specified project.
47. Add a command button to a specified animation application.
48. Modify a specified animation application.
49. Write an application that includes a large shape control.
50. Create a Form window with specified shapes and colors.
51. Debug a specified program.
52. Single step through a specified program and determine how the resource file and its built in
functions operate.
53. Create a new project using OLE controls and a Linked Word document.
54. Use VB ActiveX Document Migration Wizard.
55. Use a system Object to decrease font size of all controls
56. Use the Help utility of any OLE application and browse the application's properties, events, and
methods used in OLE automation. Look for VBA files.
57. Use Package And Deployment Wizard
58. Use File|Print to print all the Web browser form's code.

113
AT-344 PLC

Total Contact Hours

Theory 64 T P C
Practical 192 2 6 4

AIMS: After studying this course, the student will be able to:
(a) Explain the operation of Limit, Proximity and Photo Switches.
(b) Explain the operation of various sensors and relays in simple circuits.
(c) Configure circuits in the Relay Ladder Convention.
(d) Explain the accepted format for PLC. programs.
(e) List the advantages of PLC's over relay control.
(f) Explain the organization of the I/O rack.
(g) Explain the File nature and Addressing of PLC Programming
(h) Explain the addressing of inputs and outputs in a PLC.
(i) Explain Data Bit manipulation in a PLC.
(j) Use Relay Logic Instructions when Programming a PLC
(k) Use Timer and Counter instructions in a PLC program.
(l) Use Arithmetic, Logical and Move Instructions when programming the PLC
(m) Explain Output Override and I/O Update instructions in the PLC.
(n) Explain how the different Functions of a PLC are used.
(o) Configure and properly install a PLC System.
(p) Troubleshoot a PLC system

COURSE CONTENTS

1. OPERATION OF SENSORS 2 Hours

1.1. Tactile and non-tactile sensing
1.2. Types of limit switches
1.3. Concept of Normally Open/Closed
1.4. Different types of actuators
1.5. Operation of limit switches
1.6. Applications of limit switches
1.7. Faults that can occur with limit switches
1.8. Review of capacitance and inductance
1.9. Different types of proximity switches
1.10. Operation of proximity switches
1.11. Gain setting operation
1.12. Applications of proximity switches
1.13. Faults that can occur with proximity switches
1.14. Review of photo-emitters and photo-sensors
1.15. Different types of photo switches
1.16. Different scanning techniques used with photo switches
1.17. Applications of photo switches
1.18. Faults that can occur with photo switches

2. OPERATION OF SENSORS AND RELAYS IN SIMPLE CIRCUITS 2 Hours

2.1. Different types of relays
2.2. Review of the concept of magnetic fields
2.3. Review of the concept of motor force
2.4. Concept of timed on/off
2.5. Applications of relays
2.6. Review of series circuits
2.7. Operation of sensors and relays in simple circuits
2.8. Distributed control
2.9. Faults that can occur in simple circuits

114
3. INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLCs): 4 hours
3.1. Programmable logic controllers
3.2. Parts of a PLC
3.3. Principles of operation
3.4. Modifying the operation
3.5. PLCs versus computers
3.6. PLC size and applications

4. PLC HARDWARE COMPONENTS 8 hours

4.1. The I/O section
4.2. Digital I/O section
4.3. Analog I/O section
4.4. I/O specifications
4.5. The CPU
4.6. The processor-memory module
4.7. Memory design
4.8. Memory types
4.9. Programming devices
4.10. Program loaders

5. BASICS OF PLC PROGRAMMING 10 hours

5.1. Processor memory organization
5.2. Program scan
5.3. PLC programming languages
5.4. Relay-type instructions
5.5. Instruction addressing
5.6. Branch instructions
5.7. Internal relay instructions
5.8. Entering the ladder diagram
5.9. Modes of operation

6. DEVELOPING PLC WIRING DIAGRAMS AND LADDER PROGRAMS 4 hours

6.1. Electromagnetic control relays
6.2. Motor starters
6.3. Manually operated switches
6.4. Mechanically operated and proximity switches
6.5. Output control devices
6.6. Latching relays
6.7. Converting relay ladder diagrams into PLC ladder programs

7. PROGRAMMING TIMERS 4 hours

6.1. Mechanical timing relays
6.2. Timer instructions
6.3. ON-DELAY timer instruction
6.4. OFF-DELAY timer instruction
6.5. Retentive timer
6.6. Cascading timers

8. PROGRAMMING COUNTERS 4 hours

8.1. Counter instructions
8.2. Up-counters
8.3. Down-counters
8.4. Cascading counters
8.5. Incremental Encoder-counter applications

115
9. PROGRAM CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS 6 hours
9.1. Master control and zone control instructions
9.2. JUMP instructions and subroutines
9.3. IMMEDIATE INPUT and IMMEDIATE OUTPUT instructions
9.4. Forcing external I/O address
9.5. Safety circuitry

10. DATA MANIPULATION INSTRUCTIONS 6 hours

10.1. Data manipulation
10.2. Data transfer operations
10.3. Data compare instructions
10.4. Data manipulation programs
10.5. Numerical data I/O interfaces
10.6. Setpoint control

11. MATH INSTRUCTIONS 3 hours

11.1. Math instructions
11.2. Addition instructions
11.3. Subtraction instructions
11.4. Multiplication instructions
11.5. Division instructions

12. SEQUENCER INSTRUCTIONS 3 hours

12.1. Mechanical sequencers
12.2. Sequencer instructions
12.3. Sequencer program

13. PLC INSTALLATION PRACTICES, EDITING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 hours

13.1. PLC enclosures
13.2. Electrical noise
13.3. Leaky inputs and outputs
13.4. Grounding
13.5. Voltage variations and surges
13.6. Program editing
13.7. Programming and monitoring
13.8. Preventive maintenance
13.9. Troubleshooting

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bryan and Bryan, Progammable Controllers Theory and Implementation, 2nd Ed.
2. Gary Dunning, Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers

116
AT-344 PLC

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. OPERATION OF SENSORS
1.1. Explain tactile and non-tactile sensing
1.2. List the different types of limit switches
1.3. Explain the concept of Normally Open/Closed
1.4. List the different types of actuators
1.5. Explain the operation of limit switches
1.6. List applications of limit switches
1.7. Explain the faults that can occur with limit switches
1.8. Review capacitance and inductance
1.9. List the different types of proximity switches
1.10. Explain the operation of proximity switches
1.11. Explain the gain setting operation
1.12. List the applications of proximity switches
1.13. Explain the faults that can occur with proximity switches
1.14. Review photo-emitters and photo-sensors
1.15. List the different types of photo switches
1.16. Explain the different scanning techniques used with photo switches
1.17. List the applications of photo switches
1.18. Explain the faults that can occur with photo switches

2. OPERATION OF SENSORS AND RELAYS IN SIMPLE CIRCUITS

2.1. List the different types of relays
2.2. Review the concept of magnetic fields
2.3. Review the concept of motor force
2.4. Explain the concept of timed on/off
2.5. List applications of relays
2.6. Review series circuits
2.7. Analyze the operation of sensors and relays in simple circuits
2.8. Explain the distributed control
2.9. Explain the faults that can occur in simple circuits

3. INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLCs)

3.1. Introduce the Programmable logic controllers
3.2. List basic parts of a PLC
3.3. Explain principles of operation of PLC
3.4. Explain how to modify the operation through a PLC
3.5. Compare PLCs and computers
3.6. Explain variation in PLC size and relate the size with the required applications

4. PLC HARDWARE COMPONENTS

4.1. Explain the function of I/O section
4.2. Explain the function of digital I/O section
4.3. Explain the function of analog I/O section
4.4. List I/O specifications of PLCs
4.5. Explain the function of CPU
4.6. Explain the function of the processor-memory module
4.7. Explain the requirements for sizing the memory
4.8. Explain various memory types
4.9. List programming devices used for PLC programming
4.10. List various devices used for recording, storing and loading programs

117
5. BASICS OF PLC PROGRAMMING
5.1. Explain processor memory organization
5.2. Explain the process and need of scanning
5.3. Explain the two types of PLC programming languages
5.4. Explain Relay-type instructions
5.5. Define address number and explain Instruction addressing
5.6. Explain when to use branch instructions
5.7. Explain when to use Internal relay instructions
5.8. Explain how to enter the ladder diagram
5.9. Explain common operating modes of PLCs

6. DEVELOPING PLC WIRING DIAGRAMS AND LADDER PROGRAMS

6.1. Identify the function of electromagnetic control relays
6.2. Explain the function of a motor starter
6.3. Describe manually operated switches
6.4. Describe mechanically operated and proximity switches
6.5. Discuss output control devices
6.6. Explain the function of latching relays
6.7. Explain how to convert relay ladder diagrams into PLC ladder programs

7. PROGRAMMING TIMERS
7.1. Describe the function of mechanical timing relays
7.2. Teach and explain timer instructions used in PLCs
7.3. Explain the use of ON-DELAY timer instruction
7.4. Explain the use of OFF-DELAY timer instruction
7.5. Describe the function and use of a retentive timer
7.6. Explain methods of cascading timers

8. PROGRAMMING COUNTERS
8.1. Teach and explain various counter instructions
8.2. Describe the function of up-counters
8.3. Describe the function of down-counters
8.4. Explain methods of cascading counters
8.5. Discuss incremental encoder-counter applications

9. PROGRAM CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS

9.1. Discuss and explain master control and zone control instructions
9.2. Describe JUMP instructions and its use to move between subroutines
9.3. Explain the use of IMMEDIATE INPUT and IMMEDIATE OUTPUT instructions
9.4. Explain the use of forcing function of a PLC for external I/O
9.5. Describe various safety circuits provided in PLCs

10. DATA MANIPULATION INSTRUCTIONS

10.1. Define data manipulation instructions
10.2. List and explain various data transfer operations
10.3. Discuss the use of various data compare instructions
10.4. Explain how to write data manipulation programs
10.5. Describe numerical data I/O interfaces and their use
10.6. Explain various setpoint control schemes

11. MATH INSTRUCTIONS

11.1. Explain use of math instructions
11.2. Describe use of addition instructions
11.3. Describe use of subtraction instructions
11.4. Discuss and explain use of multiplication instructions
11.5. Discuss and explain use of division instructions

118
12. SEQUENCER INSTRUCTIONS
12.1. Describe various forms of mechanical sequencers
12.2. Explain how to use sequencer instructions
12.3. Explain how to develop a sequencer program

13. PLC INSTALLATION PRACTICES, EDITING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING

13.1. Explain features of a PLC enclosure
13.2. Describe the effect of electrical noise on the performance of PLCs
13.3. Discuss the effects of leaky inputs and outputs
13.4. Explain the importance of proper grounding
13.5. Describe methods to control voltage variations and protect against surges
13.6. Explain procedures for program editing
13.7. Discuss modes of programming and monitoring of PLCs
13.8. Explain and list preventive maintenance procedures
13.9. Explain procedures for troubleshooting PLCs

119
AT-344 PLC

LIST OF PRACTICALS

1. Determine the technical specifications of various sensors from the product manuals.
2. Connect various sensors in appropriate configurations to demonstrate their operation
3. Configure simple circuits as directed by the instructor
4. Configure circuits given in the relay ladder convention by the instructor from the sensors and
devices in the lab.
5. Given a circuit convert it to the relay ladder equivalent then into the accepted format for a PLC
6. Identify the various components of the PLC in the lab
7. Identify the Data, Address, Control and Power lines of the motherboard
8. Identify the various connectors on the motherboard
9. Using the circuit diagrams identify the components used in Channel 2 of the DC Input module
10. Using the circuit diagrams identify the components used in Channel 6 of the AC Input module
11. Using the circuit diagrams identify the components used in Channel 2 of the DC Output module
12. Using the circuit diagrams identify the components used in Channel 7 of the AC Output module
13. Measure the voltages on the output connector with the battery present and absent
14. Identify the addresses of various inputs assigned by the instructor
15. Identify the addresses of various outputs assigned by the instructor
16. Identify all of the keys in the programming software
17. Program the PLC to perform a simple stop/start routine.
18. Connect the necessary components to execute the program.
19. Program the PLC to perform a task as outlined by the instructor using Timer and Counter
instructions.
20. Connect the necessary components to execute the program.
21. Program the PLC to perform a task as outlined by the instructor using Arithmetic, Logical and
Move instructions.
22. Connect the necessary components to execute the program.
23. Program various routines as assigned by the instructor, which will reinforce the Output Override
and I/O Update instructions.
24. Given all the components necessary to Configure a PLC system, install a PLC system.
25. Program the PLC to perform a task as outlined by the instructor using Block Transfer instructions.
26. Connect the necessary components to execute the program.
27. Program the PLC to perform a task as outlined by the instructor using I/O Bus devices.
28. Connect the necessary components to execute the program.

120
AT-352 CNC THEORY AND APPLICATIONS

Total Contact Hour

Theory 32 T P C
Practical 96 1 3 2

AIMS: After studying this course, the student will be able to:
(a) Explain the operation of Lathes, Mills and Precision Grinders
(b) Explain fundamental concepts of CNC systems
(c) Use CNC controllers.
(d) Program simple motions in a CNC environment.

1. INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE TOOLS 8 Hours

1.1 Lathe construction, types and components:
1.1.1 Function of a lathe and its parts
i) List the parts
ii) Function of each part
iii) Inter-relationship of each part
iv) Working of a lathe
1.1.2 Different types of lathes
i) Types of lathes
ii) Description of each type of lathe
iii) Advantages and disadvantages of each lathe type
1.1.3 Use of Lathe accessories and work holding devices
i) Lathe accessories
ii) Purpose and use of the accessories
iii) Lathe attachments
iv) Purpose and use of the attachments
v) Work holding devices
vi) Purpose and use of the work holding devices
1.2 Milling machines:
1.2.1 Working principle of Milling machine
1.2.2 Different types of Milling Machine
1.2.3 Construction of universal Milling machine
1.2.4 Functions of milling machine parts
1.2.5 Care and maintenance of milling machine
1.2.6 Safety practices for operating the milling machine
1.2.7 Uses and necessity of attachments and accessories
i) Dividing Head
ii) Vertical head
iii) Rotary table
iv) Slotting attachment
v) Rack cutting attachment
1.3 Precision Grinding machines:
1.3.1 Various precision grinding machines
1.3.2 Construction and operation of the following:
i) Cylindrical grinding machine surface grinding machine
ii) Universal grinding machine
iii) Cutter grinding machine
iv) Holding devices and accessories of the grinding machines
v) Grinding fluids

2. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL (CNC) 8 Hours

2.1 Difference between using Special Purpose and Numerical Control (NC) machines
2.2 Historical background of NC (CNC)

121
2.3 Details of NC/CNC
2.3.1 Software
2.3.2 Machine Control Unit (MCU)
2.3.3 Sub units of MCU
2.3.4 Construction of machine tools
2.3.5 Advantages of NC machine tools
2.3.6 Disadvantages with NC machine tools
2.3.7 Advantages of CNC
2.3.8 Disadvantages of CNC
2.3.9 Advantages of Direct Numerical Control (DNC)
2.3.10 Disadvantages of DNC
2.3.11 Adaptive control
2.3.12 Adaptive control with optimization
2.3.13 Adaptive control with constraints
2.3.14 Transfer machines
2.3.15 Machining centers
2.3.16 Conventional machine layout
2.3.17 Linked and unlinked line systems
2.3.18 CAD/CAM
2.3.19 Parts suitable for CNC
2.3.20 Environmental control issues
2.3.21 Applications for NC/CNC
2.3.22 Economics of NC/CNC
2.4 Classification of NC/CNC Systems
2.4.1 Based on feedback control
i) Open-loop
ii) Closed-loop
iii) Semi-closed-loop
2.4.2 Feedback devices
i) Velocity feed back device types
- Velocity feed back device characteristics
- Instrumenting/calibrating velocity transducers
ii) Positional feed back devices
- Types of positional feed back devices
- Positional feed back device characteristics
- Instrumenting/calibrating positional feedback devices
2.4.3 Classification based on motion control system
i) Point to point
ii) Straight line/paraxial motion
iii) Contouring/continuous paths
- Interpolators
- Combined motion control
2.4.4 Classification based on circuit technology
i) Analog/digital
2.4.5 Co-ordinate systems
i) Absolute
ii) Incremental
iii) Units used to measure co-ordinates
2.4.6 Axis identification
i) Machines with rotating tools
ii) Machines with rotating work-pieces
iii) Machines with non-rotating tool and non-rotating work-pieces
2.5 Construction details of CNC machines
2.5.1 Mechanical system design
i) main structure of CNC machine tool
ii) slide and slide ways

122
 - hydrostatic
- anti-friction
- wear resistant
2.5.2 Spindle
i) spindle mounting
2.5.3 Drive systems
2.5.4 location of transducers
2.5.5 Swarf removal
2.5.6 Safety and guarding devices
2.6 Design features of CNC tooling devices and factors affecting the
2.6.1 Tooling for CNC machines
2.7 Cutting tools for CNC machines:
2.7.1 Preset tools
2.7.2 Qualified tools
2.7.3 Semi-qualified tools
2.7.4 Solid tools
2.7.5 Brazed tools
2.7.6 Inserted bit tools
2.7.7 High carbon tool steel
2.7.8 High speed steel
2.7.9 Cast alloy
2.7.10 Cemented carbides
2.7.11 Ceramics
2.7.12 Sialon
2.7.13 Diamond
2.7.14 Boron nitride
2.7.15 Tool holding devices
2.7.16 Spindle tooling
2.7.17 Flexible tooling
2.8 Use of work holding devices
2.9 Use of automatic tool changers

3. CNC CONTROLLERS 4 Hours

3.1 Variety of CNC controllers.
3.2 Features found in the various CNC controllers identified.
3.3 Block diagram of a typical CNC controller.
3.4 Configuration of a PC based CNC controller
3.5 Different motor type options
3.6 Machine/Axis relationships
3.7 positioning in quadrants
3.8 Machine control in the coordinate system
3.9 Motor sizing methods
3.10 Calibration of the positioning/velocity systems
3.11 Process of connecting the controller to the machine tool
3.12 Zero positioning the system
3.13 Troubleshooting the CNC system
3.14 Environmental and physical factors affecting CNC controllers

4. INTRODUCTION TO CNC PROGRAMMING 12 Hours

4.1 CNC programming terms:
4.1.1 Manuscript
4.1.2 Debug
4.1.2.1 Operator information
4.1.2.2 Heading
4.2 Purpose of Sequence numbers
4.3 Use of X and Y words and Zero suppression

123
 4.4 Use of Feed rates and Spindle speed commands
4.5 Use of programmable Z depth
4.6 Use of Miscellaneous functions (M codes)
4.7 Use of Preparatory functions (G codes)
4.8 Canned cycle
4.9 process of designing and planning for a job
4.10 Elements of the manufacturing run:
4.10.1 Setup
4.10.2 part prints and process plans
4.10.3 cutting tools
4.10.4 setting offsets
4.10.5 check-out and prove-out
4.11 Use of linear interpolation
4.12 Use of circular interpolation (I and J codes)
4.13 Process of writing a CNC program to move in a straight line a given distance
4.14 Process of writing a CNC program to move in an arc and a full circle.

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Burghadt, Machine Tool Operations, Vol. I & II)

2. Luggen, Fundamentals of Numerical Control, 2nd Ed.
3. Luggen, CNC A First Look Primer
4. Sehrawat and Narang, CNC Machines Computer Numerical Control
5. R.S. Bharj, Introduction to NC CNC Machines

124
AT-352 CNC THEORY AND APPLICATIONS

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. INTRODUCE MACHINE TOOLS

1.1 Explain the following topics of Lathe construction, types and components:
1.1.1 Describe the function of a lathe and its parts
i) List the parts
ii) Explain the function of each part
iii) Explain the inter-relationship of each part
iv) Explain the working of a lathe
1.1.2 Describe different types of lathes
i) List the types of lathes
ii) Describe each type of lathe
iii) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of each lathe type
1.1.3 Describe the use of Lathe accessories and work holding devices
i) Identify the lathe accessories
ii) Explain the purpose and use of the accessories
iii) Identify the lathe attachments
iv) Explain the purpose and use of the attachments
v) Identify the work holding devices
vi) Explain the purpose and use of the work holding devices
1.2 Explain the following topics of Milling machines:
1.2.1 Explain the working principle of Milling machine
1.2.2 Identify different types of Milling Machine
1.2.3 Explain the construction of universal Milling machine
1.2.4 Describe the functions of milling machine parts
1.2.5 Explain the care and maintenance of milling machine
1.2.6 State the safety practices for operating the milling machine
1.2.7 Describe the uses and necessity of attachments and accessories
i) Dividing Head
ii) Vertical head
iii) Rotary table
iv) Slotting attachment
v) Rack cutting attachment
1.3 Explain the following topics of Precision Grinding machines:
1.3.1 Identify the various precision grinding machines
1.3.2 Describe the construction and operation of the following:
i) Cylindrical grinding machine surface grinding machine
ii) Universal grinding machine
iii) Cutter grinding machine
iv) Holding devices and accessories of the grinding machines
v) Grinding fluids

2. INTRODUCE COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL (CNC)

2.1 Explain the difference between using Special Purpose and Numerical Control (NC)
machines
2.2 Describe the historical background of NC (CNC)
2.3 Explain the following details of NC/CNC
2.3.1 Software
2.3.2 Machine Control Unit (MCU)
2.3.3 Sub units of MCU
2.3.4 Construction of machine tools
2.3.5 Advantages of NC machine tools
2.3.6 Disadvantages with NC machine tools
2.3.7 Advantages of CNC

125
 2.3.8 Disadvantages of CNC
2.3.9 Advantages of Direct Numerical Control (DNC)
2.3.10 Disadvantages of DNC
2.3.11 Adaptive control
2.3.12 Adaptive control with optimization
2.3.13 Adaptive control with constraints
2.3.14 Transfer machines
2.3.15 Machining centers
2.3.16 Conventional machine layout
2.3.17 linked and unlinked line systems
2.3.18 CAD/CAM
2.3.19 Parts suitable for CNC
2.3.20 Environmental control issues
2.3.21 Applications for NC/CNC
2.3.22 Economics of NC/CNC
2.4 Explain the following topics on classification of NC/CNC Systems
2.4.1 Based on feedback control
i) Open-loop
ii) Closed-loop
iii) Semi-closed-loop
2.4.2 Feedback devices
i) Velocity feed back device types
- Velocity feed back device characteristics
- Instrumenting/calibrating velocity transducers
ii) Positional feed back devices
- Types of positional feed back devices
- Positional feed back device characteristics
- Instrumenting/calibrating positional feedback devices
2.4.3 Classification based on motion control system
i) Point to point
ii) Straight line/paraxial motion
iii) Contouring/continuous paths
- Interpolators
- Combined motion control
2.4.4 Classification based on circuit technology
i) Analog/digital
2.4.5 Co-ordinate systems
i) Absolute
ii) Incremental
iii) Units used to measure co-ordinates
2.4.6 Axis identification
i) Machines with rotating tools
ii) Machines with rotating work-pieces
iii) Machines with non-rotating tool and non-rotating work-pieces
2.5 Explain the following construction details of CNC machines
2.5.1 Mechanical system design
i) main structure of CNC machine tool
ii) slide and slide ways
- hydrostatic
- anti-friction
- wear resistant
2.5.2 Spindle
i) spindle mounting
2.5.3 Drive systems
2.5.4 location of transducers
2.5.5 Swarf removal

126
 2.5.6 Safety and guarding devices
2.6 Explain the design features of CNC tooling devices and factors affecting the
2.6.1 Tooling for CNC machines
2.7 Describe the following cutting tools for CNC machines:
2.7.1 Preset tools
2.7.2 Qualified tools
2.7.3 Semi-qualified tools
2.7.4 Solid tools
2.7.5 Brazed tools
2.7.6 Inserted bit tools
2.7.7 High carbon tool steel
2.7.8 High speed steel
2.7.9 Cast alloy
2.7.10 Cemented carbides
2.7.11 Ceramics
2.7.12 Sialon
2.7.13 Diamond
2.7.14 Boron nitride
2.7.15 Tool holding devices
2.7.16 Spindle tooling
2.7.17 Flexible tooling
2.8 Describe the use of work holding devices
2.9 Explain the use of automatic tool changers

3. CNC CONTROLLERS
3.1 Identify a variety of CNC controllers.
3.2 List the features found in the various CNC controllers identified.
3.3 Explain the block diagram of a typical CNC controller.
3.4 Explain the configuration of a PC based CNC controller
3.5 Explain the different motor type options
3.6 Explain the Machine/Axis relationships
3.7 Explain positioning in quadrants
3.8 Explain Machine control in the coordinate system
3.9 Explain motor sizing methods
3.10 Explain the calibration of the positioning/velocity systems
3.11 Explain the process of connecting the controller to the machine tool
3.12 Explain Zero positioning the system
3.13 Explain troubleshooting the CNC system
3.14 Explain environmental and physical factors affecting CNC controllers

4. INTRODUCE CNC PROGRAMMING

4.1 Explain the following CNC programming terms:
4.1.1 Manuscript
4.1.2 Debug
4.1.2.1 Operator information
4.1.2.2 Heading
4.2 Explain the purpose of Sequence numbers
4.3 Explain the use of X and Y words and Zero suppression
4.4 Explain the use of Feed rates and Spindle speed commands
4.5 Explain the use of programmable Z depth
4.6 Explain the use of Miscellaneous functions (M codes)
4.7 Explain the use of Preparatory functions (G codes)
4.8 Explain the term Canned cycle
4.9 Explain the process of designing and planning for a job
4.10 Describe the elements of the manufacturing run:
4.10.1 Setup

127
 4.10.2 part prints and process plans
4.10.3 cutting tools
4.10.4 setting offsets
4.10.5 check-out and prove-out
4.11 Explain the use of linear interpolation
4.12 Explain the use of circular interpolation (I and J codes)
4.13 Explain the process of writing a CNC program to move in a straight line a given distance
4.14 Explain the process of writing a CNC program to move in an arc and a full circle.

128
AT-352 CNC THEORY AND APPLICATIONS

LIST OF PRACTICALS:

1. Identify the components, sketch them and explain the operation of all the Lathes types found in
the Machine shop.
2. Identify the components, sketch them and explain the operation of all the Milling machine types
found in the Machine shop.
3. Identify the components, sketch them and explain the operation of all the Grinder types found in
the Machine shop.
4. Install a PC based CNC system into a PC
5. Configure the CNC system software
6. Test the rotation of the motors of the CNC system
7. Connect the CNC controller to an X-Y gantry and test the operation of each axis
8. Write a manuscript for a given task.
9. Determine the position of points using incremental and absolute methods
10. Use the programming environment to create a manuscript.
11. Practice using the programming environment's editor
12. Program the gantry built previously to draw a line.
13. Program the gantry to draw a square.
14. Program the gantry to draw a circle.
15. Calibrate a positional transducer.
16. Calibrate a velocity transducer.
17. Identify and sketch the axis of the machine tools found in the shop.
18. Identify and sketch the ways and bearings of the machine tools found in the shop
19. Identify and sketch all the mechanical linkages of the machine tools found in the shop.
20. Identify and record the nameplate data of all motors found on the machine tools found in the
shop.
21. Identify and sketch all the cutting tools found in the shop.
22. Identify and sketch all the work holding devices in the shop.

129
AT-363 PROCESS CONTROL

Total Contact Hour

Theory 64 T P C
Practical 96 2 3 3

AIMS: After studying this course, the student will be able to:
(a) Explain the systems concept used in industry today.
(b) Sketch a block Diagram of a basic System.
(c) Describe the function that process control systems have in industry.
(d) List the basic functions of five systems used in industry.
(e) Identify the various media used in pressure systems
(f) Describe the changes that computer technology has brought to the industrial process
field.
(g) Describe the primary function of process control.
(h) Explain the basic concept of control.
(i) Define open-loop and closed-loop system operation.
(j) Describe the operation of a PID controller.
(k) List some examples of process time lag, dead time, resistance, and capacity.
(l) Define commonly used controller terms, such as steady-state error, transient response,
stability, modes of control, and sensitivity.
(m) Use and apply the appropriate sensor (transducer) in an industrial
(n) application
(o) Use a Data Acquisition System to measure Physical Parameters for
(p) analysis.
(q) Use a Process Control Software to measure physical parameters for
analysis and process control.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. PROCESS CONTROL: A SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 10 Hours

1.1 Systems concept
1.2 Basic systems functions
1.3 Process control systems
1.4 Pressure systems:
1.4.1 Hydraulic systems
1.4.2 Pneumatic systems
1.4.3 Static pressure systems
1.4.4 Steam pressure systems
1.5 Temperature systems
1.6 Level determination systems
1.7 Flow process systems
1.8 Analytical process systems
1.9 Microcomputer processing systems

2. PROCESS CONTROL 18 Hours

2.1 Industrial processes and the need to control them
2.2 Control concept
2.3 Control systems:
2.3.1 Open-loop
2.3.2 Closed-loop
2.3.3 Closed-loop variables
2.4 Process control principles:
2.4.1 Process
2.4.2 Controlled variable

130
 2.4.3 Controllers
2.4.4 Setpoint
2.4.5 Sensor
2.4.6 Control element
2.4.7 Balanced condition
2.4.8 Self-regulation
2.5 Explanation of the followings:
2.5.1 Process time lag
2.5.2 Setpoint regulator systems
2.5.3 Setpoint follow-up systems
2.6 Controller fundamentals:
2.6.1 Modes of control
2.6.2 On-off operation
2.6.3 Proportional control
2.6.4 Integral control
2.6.5 Proportional plus integral control
2.6.6 Derivative control
2.6.7 Proportional plus derivative control
2.6.8 Proportional plus integral plus derivative control
2.7 Explanation of the following control systems:
2.7.1 Cascade control
2.7.2 Bumpless cascade control
2.8 Explanation of the following issues in controller loop tuning:
2.8.1 Need for tuning
2.8.2 Zeigler-Nichols open-loop tuning method
2.8.3 ITAE open-loop tuning method
2.8.4 Ziegler-Nichols closed-loop tuning method
2.8.5 Altered Ziegler-Nichols closed-loop tuning method
2.8.6 Software tuning methods
2.9 Codes, standards and symbols:
2.9.1 Needs for published standards:
2.9.2 ANSI
2.9.3 IEEE
2.9.4 ISA
2.9.5 NFPA
2.9.6 UL
2.9.7 SME
2.9.8 SAE
2.9.9 Measurement standards
i) Safety and health standards
ii) Metric system
iii) Conversion of SI units
iv) English to Metric conversions
2.9.10 Industrial symbols:
i) ANSI
ii) IEC
iii) IEEE
iv) ISA

3. DATA MEASURMENTS AND SENSORS (TRANSDUCERS) 12 Hours

3.1 Data interpretation and measurement errors
3.2 Interpreting errors in measurements
3.3 Physical parameters:
3.3.1 Pressure systems
3.3.2 Thermal systems
3.3.3 level determining systems

131
 3.3.4 Flow process systems
3.3.5 Analytical systems
3.4 Explanation of the following:
3.4.1 Accuracy
3.4.2 Resolution
3.4.3 Repeatability
3.4.4 Sensitivity
3.4.5 Response time
3.5 Sensor (transducer) measurements and use:
3.5.1 Bridge circuit techniques
3.5.2 Position
i) Potentiometers
ii) LVDT techniques
3.5.3 Temperature
i) RTDs
ii) Thermostats
iii) Thermistors
iv) Thermistor instrumentation
v) Thermocouples
vi) Thermocouple indicators
vii) Bimetallic thermometers
viii) Radiation pyrometers
ix) Infrared thermometry
3.5.4 Force
i) Strain guages
ii) Load cells
3.5.5 Pressure
i) Bourdon tubes
ii) Strain guage
iii) Thin film
3.5.6 Flow
i) differential-pressure
ii) variable area
iii) magnetic
iv) magnetic-piston
v) velocity
vi) positive displacement
vii) ultrasonic
viii) mass
3.5.7 Vibration
3.5.8 Level
i) float
ii) displacement
iii) capacitance
iv) electrical-conductivity
v) radiation
vi) ultrasonic
vii) bubble
viii) pressure sensitive
ix) weight-level determination
x) photoelectric
3.5.9 Analytical instruments
i) electric- or magnetic-field instruments
ii) thermal- or mechanical-energy instruments
iii) electromagnetic-radiation instruments
iv) chemical-energy instrumentation

132
 3.6 Various signal types produced from sensors
3.7 Need for signal conditioning
3.8 Linearizing the output of a sensor
3.9 Calibration process

4. BASICS OF DATA ACQUISITION 12 Hours

4.1 What is Data Acquisition
4.2 Key issues:
4.2.1 Measurements
4.2.2 Data
4.2.3 Users
4.3 Types of Data Acquisition equipment
4.4 Performances of Data Acquisition equipment
4.5 Criteria of Data Acquisition software:
4.5.1 User interface
4.5.2 Data acquisition
4.5.3 Limit checking
4.5.4 Error checking
4.5.5 Reporting requirements
4.5.6 Storage format
4.6 Types of Data Acquisition software
4.7 Applications of Data acquisition

5. BASICS OF PROCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE 12 Hours

5.1 Purpose of Process control software
5.2 Configuration of the software environment
5.3 Generation of a Graphical user interface
5.4 Tagging process of the elements in the process
5.5 Testing and debugging of the program
5.6 Use of a PLC using a PID interface for process control
5.7 Use of a PC for process control

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:

Bryan and Bryan, Progammable Controllers Theory and Implementation, 2nd Ed.
Dale Patrick and Stephen Fardo, Industrial Process Control Systems
Maloney, Solidstate Industrial Electronics, 3rd Ed.
Bannister and Whithead, Instrumentation Transducers and Interfacing
P.W. Murill, Fundamentals of Process Control, 2nd Ed.
T.A. Hughes, Measurement and Control Basics, 2nd Ed
Hoekstra, Robotics and Industrial Automation, 2nd Ed.
Manuals for Process Control software
Manuals for National Instruments Data Acquision Board.

133
AT-363 PROCESS CONTROL

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. PROCESS CONTROL: A SYSTEMS OVERVIEW

1.1 Explain the systems concept

1.2 Explain basic systems functions
1.3 Explain process control systems
1.4 Describe the following pressure systems:
1.4.1 Hydraulic systems
1.4.2 Pneumatic systems
1.4.3 Static pressure systems
1.4.4 Steam pressure systems
1.5 Describe temperature systems
1.6 Describe level determination systems
1.7 Describe flow process systems
1.8 Describe analytical process systems
1.9 Describe microcomputer processing systems

2. PROCESS CONTROL

2.1 Describe industrial processes and the need to control them

2.2 Explain the control concept
2.3 Explain the following control systems:
2.3.1 Open-loop
2.3.2 Closed-loop
2.3.3 Closed-loop variables
2.4 Explain the following process control principles:
2.4.1 Process
2.4.2 Controlled variable
2.4.3 Controllers
2.4.4 Setpoint
2.4.5 Sensor
2.4.6 Control element
2.4.7 Balanced condition
2.4.8 Self-regulation
2.5 Explain the following:
2.5.1 Process time lag
2.5.2 Setpoint regulator systems
2.5.3 Setpoint follow-up systems
2.6 Explain the following controller fundamentals:
2.6.1 Modes of control
2.6.2 On-off operation
2.6.3 Proportional control
2.6.4 Integral control
2.6.5 Proportional plus integral control
2.6.6 Derivative control
2.6.7 Proportional plus derivative control
2.6.8 Proportional plus integral plus derivative control
2.7 Explain the following control systems:
2.7.1 Cascade control
2.7.2 Bumpless cascade control
2.8 Explain the following issues in controller loop tuning:
2.8.1 Need for tuning
2.8.2 Zeigler-Nichols open-loop tuning method

134
 2.8.3 ITAE open-loop tuning method
2.8.4 Ziegler-Nichols closed-loop tuning method
2.8.5 Altered Ziegler-Nichols closed-loop tuning method
2.8.6 Software tuning method
2.9 Explain the following codes, standards and symbols:
2.9.1 Needs for published standards:
2.9.2 ANSI
2.9.3 IEEE
2.9.4 ISA
2.9.5 NFPA
2.9.6 UL
2.9.7 SME
2.9.8 SAE
2.9.9 Measurement standards. Safety and health standards
i) Metric system
ii) Conversion of SI units
iii) English to Metric conversions
2.9.10 industrial symbols:
i) ANSI
ii) IEC
iii) IEEE
iv) ISA

3. DATA MEASURMENTS AND SENSORS (TRANSDUCERS)

3.1 Review data interpretation and measurement errors

3.2 Review interpreting errors in measurements
3.3 Explain the following physical parameters and give examples of typical systems where
these are sensed in industrial processes:
3.3.1 Pressure systems
3.3.2 Thermal systems
3.3.3 Level determining systems
3.3.4 Flow process systems
3.3.5 Analytical systems
3.4 Explain the following:
3.4.1 Accuracy
3.4.2 Resolution
3.4.3 Repeatability
3.4.4 Sensitivity
3.4.5 Response time
3.5 Explain the following sensor (transducer) measurements and use:
3.5.1 Bridge circuit techniques
3.5.2 Position
i) Potentiometers
ii) LVDT techniques
3.5.3 Temperature
i) RTDs
ii) Thermostats
iii) Thermistors
iv) Thermistor instrumentation
v) Thermocouples
vi) Thermocouple indicators
vii) Bimetallic thermometers
viii) Radiation pyrometers
ix) Infrared thermometry

135
 3.5.4 Force
i) Strain guages
ii) Load cells

3.5.5 Pressure
i) Bourdon tubes
ii) Strain guage
iii) Thin film
3.5.6 Flow
i) Differential-pressure
ii) Variable area
iii) Magnetic
iv) Magnetic-piston
v) Velocity
vi) Positive displacement
vii) Ultrasonic
viii) Mass
3.5.7 Vibration
3.5.8 Level
i) Float
ii) Displacement
iii) Capacitance
iv) Electrical-conductivity
v) Radiation
vi) Ultrasonic
vii) Bubble
viii) Pressure sensitive
ix) Weight-level determination
x) Photoelectric
3.5.9 Analytical instruments
i) Electric- or magnetic-field instruments
ii) Thermal- or mechanical-energy instruments
iii) Electromagnetic-radiation instruments
iv) Chemical-energy instrumentation
3.6 Explain the various signal types produced from sensors
3.7 Explain the need for signal conditioning
3.8 Explain linearizing the output of a sensor
3.9 Explain the calibration process

4. BASICS OF DATA ACQUISITION

4.1 Explain what is Data Acquisition
4.2 Explain the following Key issues:
4.2.1 Measurements
4.2.2 Data
4.2.3 Users
4.3 Explain the types of Data Acquisition equipment
4.4 Compare the performances of Data Acquisition equipment
4.5 Explain the following criteria of Data Acquisition software:
4.5.1 User interface
4.5.2 Data acquisition
4.5.3 Limit checking
4.5.4 Error checking
4.5.5 Reporting requirements
4.5.6 Storage format
4.6 Explain the types of Data Acquisition software
4.7 Explain some applications of Data acquisition

136
5. BASICS OF PROCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE

5.1 Explain the purpose of Process control software

5.2 Explain the configuration of the software environment
5.3 Explain the generation of a Graphical user interface
5.4 Explain the tagging process of the elements in the process
5.5 Explain the testing and debugging of the program
5.6 Explain the use of a PLC using a PID interface for process control
5.7 Explain the use of a PC for process control

137
AT-363 PROCESS CONTROL

LIST OF PRACTICAL

1. Using a pneumatic circuit identify the components of this pneumatic system.

2. Using the PLC controlled pneumatic motion machine sketch a block diagram of this system.
3. Using a Servo drive, analyze the positioning accuracy in open-loop operation and closed-loop
operation.
4. Using a servo drive, analyze the speed regulation characteristics under P, PI, PD, and PID
control.
5. Using a variety of sensors (transducers), couple them to an appropriate physical parameter and
measure the output.
6. Mount a strain gauge to a cantilever
7. Wire the gauge using a 3 wire technique to a wheat stone bridge network.
8. Build and instrument grade amplifier
9. Connect the gauge to the instrument amplifier
10. Calibrate the strain gauge and instrument amplifier.
11. Connect a temperature sensor and calibrate
12. Connect a pressure sensor and calibrate
13. Connect a flow sensor and calibrate
14. Connect a level sensor and calibrate.
15. Install the Data Acquisition interface into a PC.
16. Install the Data Acquisition Software into the PC.
17. Connect the strain gauge assembled in the previous lab and the necessary components to
measure and analyze physical parameters using the Data Acquisition interface and software.
18. Use the software to determine 3 weights, maintain a record of the weights measured and output
to the screen the weight of the current measurement.
19. Connect various sensors (transducers) to the Data Acquisition interface and plot the outputs of
the sensors over a range of set points.
20. Install the process control software
21. Configure the software
22. Program the environment as outline by the instructor
23. Using the appropriate sensor(s), couple them to the Process and the control environment (PLC,
PC)
24. Verify and analyze the performance of the system

138
AT-372 FINAL PROJECT

Total Contact Hour

Theory 0 T P C
Practical 192 0 6 2

AIMS: This is a practical course, where the students will be assigned a task by the instructor, or if
appropriate and approved by the instructor a task initiated by the student, which is designed to
integrate course materials in the Automation Technology program. This task will be the real time
execution of an industry sponsored project where the student must design, build, interface,
program and commission an automated work-cell or machine process. This course is intended to
be a “capstone” course, which will integrate all the courses studied in the Automation Technology
program. In addition to a functioning automated process a complete technical report must be
submitted.

139